Vauxhall - Vectra - Owners Manual - (2004)

VAUXHALL Vectra Operation, Safety, Maintenance -2 Data specific to your vehicle Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it easily accessible. This information is available under the section "Technical data" as well as on the identification plate. Fuel Designation Engine oil Grade Viscosity Tyre inflation pressure Tyre size with up to 4 persons with full load Summer tyres Front Rear Front Rear Winter tyres Front Rear front Rear Weights Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight – EC kerb weight = Loading -1 Your Vectra Make use of the Owner's Manual: Your vehicle represents an intelligent synthesis of advanced technology, outstanding safety, environmental compatibility and economy. z Its "In Brief" section will give you an initial overview. z The table of contents at the start of the Owner’s Manual and in each individual chapter will help you find your way. z Its index will help you find what you want. z It will familiarise you with the sophisticated technology. z It will increase your pleasure in your vehicle. z It will help you to handle your vehicle expertly. It now lies with you to drive your vehicle safely and to see it performs perfectly. This Owner's Manual provides you with all the necessary information to that end. Make sure your passengers are aware of the possible risk of accident and injury which may result from improper use of the vehicle. You must always comply with the laws of the country in which you are travelling. These could differ from the information in this Owner’s Manual. The Owner's Manual should always be kept in the vehicle: ready to hand in the glove compartment. The Owner’s Manual is designed to be clearly laid-out and easily understood. This symbol signifies: 6 Continue reading on next page. 3 The asterisk signifies equipment not fitted to all vehicles (model variants, engine options, models specific to one country, optional equipment, Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories). 9 Warning 9 Warning is used to mark text regarding possible risks of accident or injury. Failure to follow the instructions could lead to injury or loss of life. Inform vehicle passengers accordingly. Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve as points of reference or indicate some action to be performed. Black arrows in the illustrations indicate a reaction or a second action to be performed. Thank you for choosing a Vauxhall. We wish you many hours of pleasurable driving. Your Vauxhall Team 0 Contents Commitment to customer satisfaction: Our aim: to keep you happy with your vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers offer first-class service at competitive prices. Experienced, factory-trained technicians work according to factory instructions. Your Authorised Repairer can supply you with GENUINE VAUXHALLAPPROVED PARTS, which have undergone stringent quality and precision checks, and of course useful and attractive VAUXHALL-APPROVED ACCESSORIES. Our name is your guarantee! For details of the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer Network, please ring this number; 0845 090 2044 In Brief ....................................................... 2 Instruments ............................................. 34 Keys, doors, bonnet ................................................ 62 Seats, Interior .......................................... 81 Safety systems ..................................... 106 Lighting ................................................. 128 Windows, Sun Roof ............................. 136 Climate control .................................... 142 Easytronic ............................................ 170 Automatic transmission ...................... 178 Driving hints ......................................... 186 Saving fuel, Protecting the environment ............ 188 Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling .................................. 190 Catalytic converter, exhaust gases .... 193 Drive Control Systems ......................... 198 Brakes .................................................... 210 Wheels, tyres ......................................... 214 Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing .......... 220 Self-help ................................................ 229 If you have a problem ......................... 264 Maintenance, Inspection System ............................ 266 Vehicle care .......................................... 278 Technical Data .................................... 282 Index ...................................................... 314 2 In Brief In Brief Key numbers, code numbers Remove key number from keys. The key number is specified in the vehicle documents and in the Car Pass 3. Alloy wheels 3, towing equipment 3: make a note of the key identifier codes. Electronic immobiliser, infotainment system 3: The code numbers are specified in the Car Pass. Do not keep the Car Pass in the vehicle. For key with retractable key blade 3, press button to extend. 6 Further information – see pages 62, 63, vehicle recommissioning – see page 277. To unlock and open the doors: Press button q, pull door handle 6 Door locks, child safety locks – see page 77, Electronic immobiliser – see page 63, Keys – see page 62, Radio remote control – see page 64, programming unlocking mode – see page 67, Central locking system – see page 66, Anti-theft locking system 3 – see page 66, Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 74. In Brief Unlock luggage compartment and open: Press button q on the remote control, press button and with the estate pull button beneath the handle To adjust front seats: Pull handle, slide seat, release handle 6 Radio remote control – see page 64, central locking – see page 66, programming unlocking mode – see page 67, vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 74, electrically operated tailgate 3 – see page 71. 6 Seat position – see page 81, electrically adjustable front seats – see page 84. Never adjust the seat while driving. It could move in an uncontrolled manner when the handle is pulled. 9 Warning Important: Do not sit nearer than 10 inches (25 cm) from the steering wheel, to permit safe airbag deployment. Adjust front seat backrests: Turn handwheel Move backrest to suit seating position. Do not lean on seat backrest whilst adjusting it. 6 Seat position – see page 81, fold front passenger seat backrest – see page 95, electrically adjustable front seats – see page 84. 3 4 In Brief To adjust front seat lumbar support 3 at front seats: Operate lever To adjust front seat height 3: Operate lever on outboard side of seat To adjust front seat inclination 3: Operate front lever on outboard side of seat Adjust lumbar support to suit personal requirements. Pump direction of the lever Up: Raises seat Down: Lowers seat Pump direction of the handle Up: Inclines seat Down: Levels seat Do not adjust driver’s seat whilst driving. Do not adjust driver’s seat whilst driving. 6 Seat position – see page 81, electrically adjustable front seats – see page 84. 6 Seat position – see page 81, electrically adjustable front seats – see page 84. Do not lean on seat backrest whilst adjusting it. 6 Seat position – see page 81, electrically adjustable front seats – see page 84. In Brief Electric seat adjustment 3: Operate switch on outboard side of seat 1 Adjusting the longitudinal position 2 Adjusting the inclination 3 Height adjustment 4 Backrest adjustment 5 Lumbar support 3 Do not adjust driver’s seat whilst driving. 6 Seat position – see page 81, electrically adjustable front seats – see page 84. To adjust thigh support 3 of the front sport seat 3: Press button in recessed handle centred in the lower half of the adjustment cushion and adjust the thigh support Adjust thigh support to suit personal requirements. Do not adjust the thigh support whilst driving. 5 To adjust head restraint height of front and rear outboard seats 3: Press button to release, adjust height, engage in position 6 Adjusting rear centre head restraint – see page 82, head restraint position – see page 82, head restraint removal – see page 82. 6 In Brief To adjust 3 head restraint angle of front and rear outboard seats 3: Swivel bottom edge of head restraint forward or rearward 6 Head restraint position – see page 82, rear head restraints – see page 82. Adjusting interior mirror: Swivel mirror housing To adjust exterior mirrors: Four-way switch in driver’s door Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing to reduce dazzle at night. If the outer mirror switch is pressed 1 the four-way switch operates the driver and front passenger mirrors 3, and if the inner mirror switch is pressed 2 it only operates the front passenger mirror. 6 Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror – see page 126. With electric seat adjustment with memory function 3: If the interior mirror switch 2 is pressed the exterior passenger mirror automatically points at the rear tyres as a parking aid when reverse gear is selected (not with trailer attached) 3. 6 Further information, aspherical exterior mirrors 3 – see page 126, automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirrors – see page 126, heated exterior mirrors – see page 18, electric seat adjustment 3 – see page 85. In Brief Swing in exterior mirror: Manually: press lightly. Electric 3 (both mirror switches must not be latched into position): Push four-way switch to the right: outside rear view mirrors swivel in. Push four-way to the left: outside rear view mirrors swivel out. The mirrors can be retracted from the outside: Press button p on the remote control approx. 1 second. The mirrors will be extended the next time the vehicle is unlocked. Swivelling only allowed at speeds of up to 4 mph (7 km/h). To engage seat belt: Draw seat belt smoothly from inertia reel, guide over shoulder and engage in belt buckle The belt must not be twisted at any point. The lap belt must lie snugly against the body. The backrest must not be tilted back too far (recommended tilting angle approx. 25°). To release belt, press red button on belt buckle. 6 Seat belts – see pages 106 to 110, airbag systems 3 – see page 112, seat position – see page 81. 7 To disengage steering column lock: To release the lock, move the steering wheel slightly, turn key to position 1 Positions: 0 = Ignition off 1 = Steering released, ignition off 2 = Ignition on, with diesel engine: preheating 3 = Start 6 Starting – see page 21, electronic immobiliser – see page 63, remove key and lock steering wheel – see page 22. 8 In Brief In Brief Page 11 Parking lamps, dipped beam ....... 128 Instrument illumination ................. 133 Fog tail lamp .................................. 130 Fog lamps 3 ................................... 130 Headlamp range adjustment 3 .... 129 Page 23 Heated seat (left) 3 and seat climate control ...................... 145 Hazard warning lamps .................. 16 Parking distance sensor 3 ........... 204 Central information display for time, date, outside temperature, infotainment system 3 check control 3, trip computer 3, climate control system 3................. 42 12 Bonnet release lever ........................ 80 25 Fuse box ......................................... 246 Turn signal lamps ............................ 15 Headlamp flash, Dipped and main beam .................. 14 Door-to-door light function 3 ....... 132 Parking lamps ............................... 132 Cruise control 3 .............................. 202 16 Steering wheel adjustment ............ 14 1 Page Side air vents .................................. 144 2 Front passenger airbag ................ 112 3 Centre air vents ............................. 144 4 Infotainment system 3 ................... 59 5 6 9 13 Ignition lock with steering wheel lock .......................................... 7 14 Accelerator pedal ......................... 186 15 Brake pedal ........................... 187, 210 17 Clutch pedal 3 ............................... 187 18 Right heated seat 3 and Seat climate control 3 ................... 145 Vauxhall alarm system 3 ............... 74 Rear window blind 3 .................... 141 and Electronic Stability Program 3 ..... 198 SPORT mode 3 ............................. 200 7 Remote control 3 for infotainment system ........................ 60 8 Instruments ....................................... 34 9 Horn .................................................. 16 19 Ashtrays ......................................... 102 10 Windscreen wiper, windscreen wash system, headlamp wash system 3 and rear window wash system 3 ........... 16 20 Stowage compartment 3 with AUX input 3 ............................ 60 21 Cigarette lighter 3 or socket ........ 101 22 Climate control .............................. 165 24 Glove compartment ............. 103, 134 10 In Brief Control indicators T Winter programme of automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3, see pages 174, 182. ( Door open 3, see page 36. j Easytronic 3, Start engine 3, see page 171. t Bulb replacement 3, see pages 36, 252. s Open luggage compartment, see pages 36, 70. Coolant temperature, see pages 35, 41. > Fog lights 3, see pages 36, 130. 8 Exterior lights, see pages 35, 128. C 1 Sport programme of automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3, see pages 173, 182. r O Turn signal lights, see pages 15, 34. I Engine oil pressure, see page 34. R p v W Brake system, Clutch system, see pages 35, 212, 272. Alternator, see page 35. Airbag systems, Belt tensioners, see pages 108, 117. Main beam, see pages 14, 36. Fog tail light, see pages 36, 130. r Parking distance sensor 3, Fault, see page 204. u Continuous Damping Control 3, Fault, see page 200. X Seat belt 3, see page 36. A Engine electronics, Immobiliser, Transmission electronics 3, Diesel fuel filter 3, Fault, see pages 37, 63, 196. ! Preheating system 3, Diesel particle filter 3, see page 37. H Coolant fluid level, see pages 37, 271. u Anti-lock brake system, see page 213. In Brief p Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering, Fault, see page 37. v Electronic Stability Programme (ESP®Plus ) 3, see page 198. y Seat occupancy recognition 3, see page 118. S Engine oil level, see pages 38, 268. m Cruise control 3, see page 202. Y Fuel level, see pages 38, 41, 229. Z Exhaust emission 3, see pages 38, 195. w B Tyre pressure monitoring system 3, see pages 38, 206. Adaptive driving light (Adaptive Forward Lighting = AFL) 3, Fault, see pages 38, 131. Lighting Light switch, Stalk positions, see pages 14, 128, 7 8 9 Lights off, AUTO Automatic dipped beam activation 3, see page 129. Parking lights, Dipped beam, main beam. > Fog lights 3, see pages 36, 130. r Fog tail light, see pages 36, 130. C 11 Main beam, see page 14. O Turn signal lights, see page 15. k Instrument illumination, see page 133. ? Headlight range adjustment 3, see page 129. c Interior lighting, see page 133. a Reading lights, front 3, see page 133. ¨ Hazard warning lights, see page 16. 12 In Brief Climate control x Air flow, see pages 147, 163. Air distribution, see pages 147, 162, L to head area via adjustable air vents and to foot well, M to head area via adjustable air vents front and rear 3, l J to the windscreen and the front door windows, to the windscreen, to the front door windows and to the footwell, K to foot well. V Demisting and defrosting 3, see pages 152, 157, 161. Ü Heated rear window, see page 145. n Air conditioning system 3, see page 150. 4 Sun roof 3 ü Air recirculation system 3, see page 150. Sun roof, opening – see page 139. d A Automatic control of fan speed 3, see page 159. Sun roof, closing – see page 139. f Sun roof, comfort setting – see page 139. AUTO Automatic mode 3, Climate control system, see page 159. e Sun roof, raising – see page 139. ß Heated seats 3, see page 145. A b Windscreen wiper Stalk positions, see page 16, Driver’s seat with climate control 3, see page 146. § $ Off, Remote control of auxiliary heating/ ventilation 3, see page 165. % & Slow, Timed interval wipe, or automatic wipe with rain sensor 3, Fast . In Brief Information display, Infotainment system 3 Information display, see page 42. Miscellaneous p Central locking system, locking – see page 66. q Central locking system, unlocking – see page 66. r Parking distance sensor 3, see page 204. SPORT SPORT mode 3, see page 200. j Horn, see page 16. T Automatic transmission 3, Easytronic 3, Winter programme, see pages 174, 182. Ö On button for date and time and time, see page 44. ; Date and time setting button, See page 44. r Boot lid/tailgate, unlocking – see page 70. Remote control 3 for infotainment system, see page 60. x Luggage compartment, unlocking – see page 70. F Electrically operated tailgate 3, opening – see page 71. j Central locking switch, unlocking, see page 67. Automatic transmission 3, Selector lever lock, see page 179. + First-aid kit (cushion) 3, see page 234. ¨ Warning triangle 3:, see page 234. Cruise control 3 Buttons on turn signal stalk, see page 202. m g § Activate, store, accelerate, Resume stored speed, decelerate, Deactivate. m ) Central locking switch, locking, see page 67. Ä Vauxhall alarm system 3, see page 74. z Child safety switch 3, see page 137. N Rear window blind 3, see page 141. 13 14 In Brief Steering wheel adjustment 3: Move lever down, adjust height and distance, move lever up, engage Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is stationary and steering column lock is released. Light switch: 7 = Off 8 = Parking lights 9 = Dipped or main beam AUTO = Automatic dipped beam activation 3 6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 112. Press > = Fog lights 3 Press r = Fog tail light 6 Further information – see page 128, headlight warning device – see page 22. Switch between dipped and main beam: Main beam = Push stalk forward Dipped beam = Push stalk forward again or pull toward steering wheel The blue control indicator C is illuminated when main beam is on. In Brief Headlight flash: Pull stalk towards steering wheel Turn signals: Right = Move stalk up Left = Move stalk down To operate cruise control 3: Press buttons on stalk After operation, the turn signal stalk returns to its starting position. Switch off: briefly press button §. If the stalk is moved past the resistance point, the turn signal light remains on. When the steering wheel moves back toward the straight-ahead position, the turn signal light is automatically deactivated. Tap signal: Move stalk to resistance point and release to activate three flashes from the turn signals when changing lanes or the like. If the stalk is moved past the resistance point the turn signal remains on. Switch the turn signal off manually by moving the stalk slightly. Switch on: briefly press button m. Resume at stored speed: briefly press button g. 6 Cruise control 3 – see page 202. 15 16 In Brief Hazard warning lights: On = Press ¨ Off = Press ¨ again To operate horn: Press j in middle of steering wheel To aid location of the pushbutton, the red surface is illuminated when the ignition switched on. When the button is pressed, its control indicator flashes in time with the hazard warning lights. 6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 112, Remote control for Infotainment system 3 – see page 60. Windscreen wiper: Gently tap stalk upward § = Off $ = Adjustable timed interval wipe % = Slow & = Fast Stalk always moves back to starting position. Shift to next higher or lower level: move stalk slightly. Push stalk past resistance point and hold: the windscreen wiper stages are run through; an acoustic signal sounds at position §. Adjustable interval wipe $: Shorter intervals = turn adjuster wheel to right Longer intervals = turn adjuster wheel to left Press the stalk down from position §: Single swipe. 6 Further information – see pages 273, 274, 279. In Brief Automatic wiping with rain sensor 3: Move stalk upward $ = automatic wiping with rain sensor Automatic wiping $: the rain sensor detects the quantity of water on the windscreen and automatically controls the windscreen wiper. The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted using the adjuster wheel: Automatic wiping $: Less sensitive = to the left More sensitive = to the right To switch off, move stalk downwards. 6 Further information – see pages 273, 274, 279. Operating windscreen and headlight wash systems 3: Pull stalk towards steering wheel The wiper is switched on for several wipe operations. A single after-wipe occurs at speeds of up to 80 mph (130 km/h). The headlight wash system 3 is ready for operation when the headlights are switched on. Wash fluid is sprayed onto the headlights once. Then the headlight wash system is disabled for 2 minutes. On vehicles fitted with rain sensor 3, keep the sensor area clean. 6 Further information – see pages 274, 279. 17 Rear window wiper 3 and wash system 3 operation: Wiper on = Push stalk forward Wiper off = Push stalk forward again Wash = Press and hold The rear window wiper operates in intermittent mode. Rear window wiping takes place automatically with the windscreen wiper switched on and reverse gear selected. When washing, the wiper swipes for a few strokes. At low speeds, there is a one-time post-wash swipe. The rear window wash system is deactivated when the fluid level is low. 6 Further information – see pages 273, 274, 279. 18 In Brief Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors: On = Press Ü Off = Press Ü again Heating operational only with engine running. The rear window and exterior mirror heating is switched off automatically after approx. 15 minutes. 6 Further information – see page 145. To demist or defrost windows: Set air distribution to l, rotary switch for temperature and air flow clockwise; Air conditioning system 3: Press buttons n and V, climate control system 3: Press buttons n and V, turn rotary switch for temperature clockwise, air flow to A; Climate control system 3: Press button V Open front air vents, direct side air vents towards the door windows. Close centre air vents 3. 6 Climate control – see page 142. Setting automatic mode of climate control system 3: Press AUTO button, set temperature for driver and passenger sides using left and right rotary knobs All front air vents open. If desired, the rear vents also 3. 6 Climate control system 3 – see page 158. In Brief Range Inst. consumpt. 19,5° 23° 5 257 miles 21.3 miles/gal Eco x Information display: Display the information – – – – – – – – 19 Time, outside temperature, radio 3 and date, navigation 3, telephone 3, check control 3, trip computer 3, climate control system 3. 6 Info Display – see page 42. 19:36 Manual transmission: Reverse gear: with vehicle stationary, three seconds after de-clutching, pull the ring up and engage gear. If the gear does not engage, set the lever in neutral, release the clutch pedal and depress again; then repeat gear selection. Easytronic 3: N = Idle o = Drive position + = Higher gear = Lower gear A = Change between Automatic and Manual mode R = Reverse (with selector lever lock) The selector lever must always be moved in the appropriate direction as far as it will go. Upon release, it automatically returns to the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/mode indicator in the transmission display. The foot brake must be depressed when starting. 6 Easytronic 3 – see page 170. 20 In Brief In order to leave P switch on ignition, operate foot brake and press button on selector lever. To engage P or R, push button on selector lever. P: Only with vehicle stationary, first apply hand brake R: Only with vehicle stationary 6 Automatic transmission 3 – see page 178. Automatic transmission 3: P = Park position R = Reverse gear N = Neutral position (idling) D = Automatic gear selection Selector lever in D to the left: Manual mode + = Higher gear or stage = Lower gear or stage P or N must be engaged when starting. Exhaust gases are poisonous Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is extremely poisonous but is odourless and colourless. Therefore never inhale exhaust gases, and never run the engine in an enclosed space. Avoid driving with an open luggage compartment. Otherwise, exhaust gases could penetrate the interior. In Brief 21 Before starting off, check: z Tyre pressure and condition – see pages 206, 215, 299. z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine compartment – see pages 267 to 275. z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting and number plates are free from dirt, snow and ice and operational. z Do not place any objects in front of the rear window, on the instrument panel or in the area in which the airbags inflate. z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are correctly adjusted. z Check brakes. To start engine: Operate clutch and brake, automatic transmission 3 in P or N, Easytronic 3: Depress brake, do not accelerate; Petrol engine: Turn key to 3; Diesel engine: Turn key to 2, when control indicator ! goes out1), turn key to 3; Release key once engine is running To restart or switch off the engine, turn key back to 0. To switch on the ignition, only turn the key to 2. 1) Preheating system switches on only if outside temperature is low. Releasing the hand brake: Raise lever slightly, press lock button, lower lever fully To reduce operating forces, depress foot brake at the same time. And now "Have a good journey!" Drive carefully, economically and with the environment in mind. While driving, do not do anything that could distract you. 22 In Brief Warning buzzers When starting the engine or whilst driving: z if seat belt is not fastened 3, z if a door or the tailgate is ajar, z once you have reached a certain speed if the hand brake is applied 3, z if a specified maximum speed is exceeded 3, When the vehicle is parked and the driver’s door is opened: z When the key is in the starter switch 3, z with parking lights or dipped beam switched on z with Easytronic 3 – if the hand brake is not applied and no gear is engaged when the engine is off z for Easytronic 3 - if A, M or R is selected while the engine is running and the driver’s door is opened but the foot brake is not depressed. Parking the vehicle: Apply handbrake firmly, engine off, remove key, lock steering wheel, lock vehicle To lock and activate Vauxhall alarm system 3 press button p. To activate the anti-theft locking system 3 press button p again. 6 Further information – see pages 63, 186, radio remote control – see page 64, central locking system – see page 66, Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 74, vehicle decommissioning – see page 277. In Brief Advice when parking: z Do not park vehicle on easily ignitable surfaces, since the hot exhaust system temperatures could cause the surface to ignite. z Closing windows and sun roof 3. z Always apply the hand brake fully, raising the armrest 3 when doing so. When parking on an incline, pull the hand brake as far as it will go. To reduce operating forces, depress the foot brake at the same time. z Before switching off ignition: with manual transmission, engage first or reverse gear; with automatic transmission 3, selector lever in P; with Easytronic 3 engage first or reverse gear (note gear indicator – see page 171). z On vehicles with Easytronic 3 control indicator R flashes for a few seconds after the ignition is switched off if the hand brake has not been applied – see page 175. z In vehicles with automatic transmission 3 the key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P. 23 z Remove ignition key. z Turn steering wheel until lock is felt to engage (anti-theft protection). z The engine cooling fans may run after the engine has been switched off – see page 267. 6 Further information – see pages 276, 277. 24 In Brief Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories Service work, Maintenance We recommend that you entrust all work to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can provide you with reliable service and correctly perform all work according to factory instructions. 6 Vauxhall Service – see page 264, service interval display – see pages 39, 266. We recommend that you use "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and conversion parts approved expressly for your vehicle type. These parts have undergone special tests to establish their reliability, safety and specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous market monitoring, we cannot assess or guarantee these – attributes for other products, even if they have been granted approval by the relevant authorities – or in some other form. "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and conversion parts approved by Vauxhall can be obtained from your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can – also provide expert advice on permitted technical changes – and ensure correct installation. 9 Warning Carry out regularly the checks recommended in the individual sections of this Owner’s Manual. Ensure that your vehicle is serviced at the service intervals specified in the Service Booklet. We recommend that you entrust this work to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Have faults remedied without delay! Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If necessary, interrupt your journey. 6 Maintenance – see page 266. In Brief 25 That was the most important information for your first drive in your Vectra in brief. The other pages of this chapter contain a summary of the interesting functions in your vehicle. The remaining chapters of the Owner’s Manual contain important information on operation, safety and maintenance as well as a complete index. 26 In Brief Vauxhall Full Size airbag system The Vauxhall Full Size airbag system comprises several individual systems. Front airbag system The front airbag system will be triggered in the event of a serious accident involving a frontal impact and forms safety cushions for the driver and front passenger. The forward movement of the driver and front passenger is checked and the risk of injuries to the upper body and head thereby substantially reduced. Side airbag system 3 The side airbag system triggers when a side-on collision occurs and provides a safety barrier for the driver and/or passenger in the respective front door area. This reduces the risk of injury to the upper body considerably in case of a side impact. Curtain airbag system 3 The curtain airbag system triggers in case of a side-on collision and provides a safety barrier in the head area on the respective side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of injury to the head considerably in case of a side-on collision. 6 Airbag systems 3 – see page 112. In Brief 27 Active head restraints 3 at front seats Operating menus in the information display 3 Selection using multifunction button: rotate and press multifunction button. In the event of a rear-end impact, the active head restraints automatically tilt forwards. The head is more effectively supported by the head restraint and the risk of injuries caused by whiplash in the neck area is reduced. Menu options are selected using menus and using the buttons/four-way button or the multifunction button of the Infotainment system 3 or the left-hand adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. The respective menu options are shown on the display. To exit a menu, turn the multifunction button left or right to Return or Main and select. Active head restraints are identified by the lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint guide sleeves. Selection using four-way button: press four-way button at top, bottom, left or right. 6 Info Display – see page 42. 28 In Brief Range Inst. consumpt. 19,5° Selection using left-hand adjuster wheel on steering wheel: rotate and press adjuster wheel. 23° 5 257 miles Coolant level 21.3 miles/gal Eco x 19:36 check OK Trip computer 3 Check control 3 The trip computers provide information on driving data, which is continually recorded and evaluated electronically. The check control software monitors Functions: z Range z Instantaneous consumption z Distance travelled z Average speed z Effective consumption z Average consumption z Stop watch z Tyre pressure 3 6 Trip computer – see pages 48, 54. z Fluid levels z Tyre pressure 3 z Radio remote control battery z Vauxhall alarm system 3 z Important exterior lighting lights, including cables and fuses 6 Check control – see page 58. In Brief Remote control for Infotainment system 3 The functions of the Infotainment system 3 and the information display can be operated using the buttons on the steering wheel. Further information is available in the infotainment system operating instructions. 29 Twin Audio 3 Parking distance sensor 3 Twin Audio allows rear seat occupants the choice between the audio source played on the infotainment system or a separate audio source. When reverse gear is selected, the parking distance sensor switches itself on automatically. Only an audio source that is not currently active on the infotainment system can be controlled using Twin Audio. Two headphone connections are available, with separate volume controls. Further information is available in the infotainment system operating instructions. The parking distance sensor can also be activated at speeds of less than 15 mph (25 km/h) by pressing the r button on the instrument panel. If the vehicle approaches an obstacle to the front or rear, an series of signals is sounded in the vehicle interior. The interval between the signals becomes shorter as the distance is reduced. If the distance is less than 30 cm, the signal will be continuous. 6 Further information – see page 204. 30 In Brief Travel Assistant 3 The Travel Assistant Contains z z z z z z Armrest Stowage compartments Waste container Drink holders Accessory sockets Connection console e.g. for DVD player 3 z Electric cool box z Tables z Twin Audio (rear audio module) 3 or stowage compartment The Travel Assistant is installed on a console above the middle seat in the rear. 6 Further information – see page 87. Tables 3 Fold table down. 1 Fold armrest up and and use recessed grip to pull table upwards as far as it will go. 4 Fold armrest down and set the table to the desired position by sliding it forward or rearward. 2 Swivel table forward. In Brief 31 Ü Board Computer BC 1 BC 2 Timer Tyres FlexOrganizer 3 SPORT mode 3 The side walls contain retaining strips, where various components can be attached to divide the luggage compartment or fasten loads. To activate Press the SPORT button. The LED in the button illuminates. The system consists of z variable partition net z variable partition wall z partition rod z mesh pockets for the side walls z hooks 6 Further information – see page 98. SPORT mode is used to change damping 3, steering 3, throttle application and the shifting times and shifting points for Easytronic 3 and automatic transmission 3 while driving. Damping and steering become more direct and provide better contact with the road surface. The engine reacts more quickly to accelerator movements. With Easytronic 3 and automatic transmission 3, the shift times are shortened and shifting takes place at higher revs (not with cruise control enabled 3). 6 Further information – see page 200. Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 The tyre pressure monitoring system continuously monitors the pressure of all four tyres while the vehicle is being driven. A pressure sensor is installed in each wheel. The inflation pressures of the individual tyres are transmitted to a controller, where they are compared. The current tyre pressures can be displayed on the graphical information display or the colour information display 3. Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in the form of messages on the information display whilst driving. 6 Further information – see page 206. 32 In Brief Turn lighting 2 An additional light comes on at certain steering wheel settings (after approx. 90°), turn signal settings and speeds (up to approx. 25 mph / 40 km/h). The light beam projects at a 90° angle to the left or right of the vehicle up to a distance of approx. 30 metres. Motorway lighting At higher speeds and continuous straight ahead travel, the dipped beam automatically raises slightly, thereby increasing headlight range. Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights, improves illumination of z curves (curve lighting) z intersections and tight turns (turn lighting) Curve lighting 1 The Xenon light beam pivots based on steering wheel position and speed (from approx. 6 mph / 10 km/h). The headlights shine at an angle of up to 15° to the right or left of the direction of travel. 6 Further information – see page 131. In Brief 33 z To close – Press r on the remote control, until the tailgate is closed or – with the key in the ignition switch and the hand brake applied, press button x in the driver’s door until the tailgate is closed or – press button F in the tailgate. 6 Further information – see page 71. Electrically operated tailgate 3 z To open – Press button r on the remote control for approx. 1 second or – with the key in the ignition switch and the hand brake applied, press x in the driver’s door approx. 1 second or – unlock the tailgate and open by pulling the button under the handle. Towing equipment with pivoting coupling ball bar 3 The release lever is in the left stowage compartment in the luggage compartment. Open cover. z Pull release lever downward – The LED is illuminated as long as the coupling ball bar is not engaged. – In addition, a warning buzzer sounds and the coupling ball bar pivots downward. z Pivot the coupling ball bar rearward until it engages. – LED must go out – Warning buzzer must cease – Otherwise, repeat the procedure. 6 Further information – see page 221. 34 Instruments Instruments Control indicators The control indicators described here are not present in all vehicles. The description applies to all instrument versions. O Turn signal lights The relevant control indicator flashes when the turn signal is on. Both control indicators flash with the hazard warning lights on. Control indicators ................................ Instrument display ............................... Information display ............................. Radio reception 3................................ AUX input 3......................................... Infotainment system 3........................ Remote control for infotainment system 3 and information display .. Twin Audio 3 ....................................... Electronic data acquisition at toll systems 3........................................... Mobile telephones and radio equipment 3...................................... 34 40 42 59 60 60 60 60 61 61 Rapid flashing: failure of turn signal or associated fuse. Trailer turn signal failure 3. For bulb replacement see page 252, for fuses see page 246. I Engine oil pressure The control indicator illuminates when the ignition is switched on and goes out shortly after the engine starts. Illuminates when the engine is running Engine lubrication may be interrupted. This may result in damage to the engine and/or locking of the drive wheels: 1. Move out of the flow of traffic as quickly as possible without impeding other vehicles. 2. Depress clutch. 3. Shift manual transmission or Easytronic 3 into neutral; for automatic transmission 3, set selector lever to N. 4. Switch off ignition. 9 Warning When the engine is off, considerably more force is needed to brake and steer. Do not remove key until vehicle has come to a standstill, otherwise the steering column lock could engage unexpectedly. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Instruments 35 v Airbag systems 3, belt tensioners 3 If it illuminates while driving, there is a fault in the airbag systems, seat occupancy recognition 3 or the belt tensioners, see pages 108, 117. W R Picture no: 18276j.tif Brake system, clutch system The control indicator illuminates when the ignition is switched on if the hand brake is applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is too low. Further information – see pages 212, 272. For vehicles with Easytronic 3, the control indicator flashes for a few seconds when the ignition is turned off if the hand brake is not applied. 9 Warning If it illuminates when the hand brake is not applied: Stop the vehicle; interrupt your journey immediately. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. p Picture no: Alternator The control indicator illuminates when the ignition is switched on and goes out shortly after the engine starts. Flashing while starting Battery voltage too low. Have electrical system tested in a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Illuminates when the engine is running Stop, switch engine off. Battery is not charged. Engine cooling may not be operating. With a diesel engine the brake servo unit may stop operating. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Coolant temperature Illuminates when the engine is running Stop and turn engine off, coolant temperature is too high. Risk of engine damage. For coolant temperature display see page 41. Check coolant level immediately, see page 270. 8 Exterior lights The control indicator is illuminated when the exterior lights are on – see page 128. 1 SPORT mode of automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 The control indicator is illuminated when SPORT mode 3 is engaged. Further information – see pages 173, 181. 6 36 Instruments > Fog lights 3 The control indicator is illuminated when the fog lights are on – see page 130. C Main beam The control indicator illuminates if the main beam is on and during headlight flash – see pages 14, 128. r Picture no: 18276j.tif T Winter program of automatic transmission 3 Easytronic 3 Control indicator is illuminated when winter program is enabled. Further information – see pages 174, 182. ( Door open Illuminates with the doors open. j Picture no: Easytronic 3, start engine The control indicator illuminates when the ignition is turned on if the foot brake is not operated. It goes off as soon as the foot brake is operated. The engine can only be started with the foot brake operated – see page 171. t Bulb replacement 3 A bulb has failed. Check the lights, and exchange the failed bulb. Bulb exchange – see page 252. s Bootlid open Illuminates with the luggage compartment open, close luggage compartment – see page 70. Fog tail light The control indicator is illuminated when the fog tail light is on – see page 130. r Parking distance sensor 3 see page 204. u Continuous Damping Control 3, SPORT mode see page 200. X Seat belt 3 The control indicator illuminates when the ignition is switched on and remains illuminated until the seat belt is fastened. If the seat belt is not yet fastened after driving off, an acoustic warning also sounds. Fastening the seat belt – see page 109. Instruments A Engine electronics, transmission electronics 3, diesel fuel filter 3, immobiliser Illuminates when the engine is running Fault in engine electronics or transmission electronics. Electronics switch to emergency running programme, fuel consumption may increase and driveability of the vehicle may be impaired – see page 196. Consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 1) Diesel engines Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTH: Have water drained from diesel fuel filter, see page 270. Flashes when the ignition is on Fault in the electronic immobiliser system; the engine cannot be started – see page 63. ! Preheating system 3, Diesel particle filter 3 Lights Preheating system active, switches on only if outside temperature is low. Flashing (with diesel particle filter) Diesel particle filters must be cleaned. Continue driving and as soon as the road and traffic conditions permit it, increase speed to more than 25 mph (40 km/h), at which point diesel particle filter cleaning will start. The control indicator goes off as soon as cleaning is complete. We recommend leaving the ignition switched on during the cleaning. Further information – see page 197. H Coolant level Illuminates when the engine is running Coolant fluid level too low. Stop, turn off engine. Check coolant fluid level immediately, see page 271. u Anti-lock brake system see page 212. 1) Sales designation – see page 284 p 37 Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering Fault in electro-hydraulic steering system. Power steering may not work. Vehicle can still be steered, but considerably more force is required. We recommend you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. v Electronic Stability Programme (ESP®Plus ) 3 see page 198. y Seat occupancy recognition 3 see page 118. 38 Instruments If it flashes when the engine is running: Fault that can lead to destruction of the catalytic converter is indicated – see page 195. Consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. w Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 Illuminated red Tyre pressure difference, check tyre pressure at next opportunity. S Picture no: 18276j.tif Engine oil level 3 Illuminates when the engine is running Engine oil level too low. Check engine oil level and top up engine oil if necessary – see page 268. m Cruise control 3 see page 202. Y Fuel level Lights Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserve area. Flashing Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately. Never let the tank run dry! Picture no: Petrol engines: erratic fuel supply can cause catalytic converter to overheat – see page 193. Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed the fuel system as described on page 229. Z Exhaust gases 3 The control indicator illuminates when the ignition is switched on and goes out shortly after the engine starts. Illuminates when the engine is running Fault in emission control system. The permitted emission limits may be exceeded. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Flashes red Considerable pressure difference or direct loss of pressure, stop immediately and check tyres and tyre pressure. Illuminated yellow Fault in system, consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Tyre pressure monitoring system – see page 206. B Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) System fault. In the event of malfunction of the curve lighting pivot function, the releveant dipped beam light is deactivated. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. AFL – see page 131. Instruments D Automatic mode of automatic transmission. 1-5 Manual mode, current gear for Easytronic. 1-5 1-6 3 and Manual mode, selected gear with automatic. 39 For Easytronic 3, the display flashes for a few seconds if A, M or R is selected when the engine is running but the foot brake is not depressed. Picture no: 17536j.tif Transmission display 3 Display of the selected gear position with automatic transmission 3 or the selected gear with Easytronic 3: P Park position of automatic transmission. R Reverse gear. N Neutral or idling position. A Automatic mode of Easytronic. M Manual mode of Easytronic. Picture no: 17858j.tif InSP Service interval display 3 When InSP appears in the odometer display, make an appointment with a workshop for servicing as soon as possible. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Maintenance, inspection system – see page 266. 40 Instruments Odometer Records the miles driven. Display in the event of airbag system malfunction – see page 117. Trip odometer To set to zero, hold reset knob down for approx. 2 seconds with ignition switched on. Picture no: 17537j.tif Instrument display On some versions, the pointer of the tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge briefly moves to its end position when the ignition is switched on. Picture no: Tachometer Indicates engine speed. Warning zone: Maximum permissible engine speed exceeded; danger to engine. Speedometer Indicates the vehicle speed. Instruments 41 For physical reasons, the engine temperature gauge shows the coolant temperature only if the coolant level is adequate. During operation the system is pressurised. The temperature may therefore rise briefly to over 100 °C. Picture no: 17538j.tif Coolant temperature display Pointer in zone at left = Engine operating temperature not yet reached Pointer between the zones Pointer in warning zone at right or W is illuminated = Normal operating temperature Picture no: 17539j.tif Fuel gauge Pointer in left zone or Y illuminated Pointer in left zone or Y flashing = Reserve area = Fill up – see page 191 Never run the tank dry! = Temperature too high: Stop. Switch off engine. Risk of engine damage. Check coolant level immediately, see page 271. Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed the fuel system as described on page 229. Because of the fuel remaining in the tank, the amount of fuel required to fill the tank may be less than the specified tank capacity. 42 Instruments 12:01 17 ,0°C FM 3 90,6 MHz REG AS RDS TP 11:25 } 21 .5°C Range Range RDS [TP] 257miles Picture no: 17336t.tif Information display Triple information display Display of time, outside temperature and date/infotainment system 3 (when it is on). When the ignition is off, the time, date and outside temperature can be presented for 15 seconds by briefly pressing one of the two buttons below the display. An F in the display indicates a fault. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17337t.tif Board information display 3 Display of time, outside temperature and date/infotainment system 3 (when it is on). An F in the display indicates a fault. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Inst. consumpt. 19,5° 23° 5 257 miles 21.3 miles/gal Eco x 19:36 Picture no: 17329t.tif Graphical information display 3, Colour information display 3 Display of time, outside temperature, date/ infotainment system 3 (when it is on) and climate control system 3. The graphical information display presents the information in monochrome. The colour information display presents the information in colour. Instruments The type of information and how it is displayed depends on the equipment of the vehicle and the Infotainment system 3,trip computer 3 and climate control system 3 settings. Some information appears in the display in an abbreviated form. For Infotainment system see Infotainment system instructions. For climate control system - see page 158. An F in the display indicates a fault. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 43 : 8:56 -5 ,5°C 07.04.2004 Slippery road -2,5°C OK Picture no: 17336t.tif Outside temperature A fall in temperature is indicated immediately and a rise in temperature after a time delay. If outside temperature drops to 3 °C, the symbol : illuminates in the triple information display or the board information display 3 as a warning for icy road surfaces. : remains illuminated until temperatures reach at least 5 °C. Picture no: 17338t.tif In vehicles with graphical information display 3 or colour information display 3, an icy road surface warning message appears in the display. No message is displayed if the temperature is less than -5 °C. 9 Warning Caution: The road surface may already be icy even though the display indicates a few degrees above 0 °C. 44 Instruments 8:56 5 ,5°C 07.04.2004 Picture no: 17024t.tif Triple information display Set date and time Infotainment system off: press Ö and ; below the display as follows: Press Ö for approx. 2 seconds: Day flashes ;: Set day Ö: Month flashes ;: Set month Ö: Year flashes ;: Set year Ö: Hours flash ;: Set hours Ö: Minutes flash ;: Set minutes Ö: Clock is started. Correcting time 3 Some RDS transmitters do not send a correct time signal. If the incorrect time is continually displayed, deactivate automatic time synchronisation 3, see next column, and set the time manually. The automatic setting is indicated by } in the display. Deactivating/activating automatic time synchronisation: infotainment system off, press Ö and ; below the display: Hold down Ö for approx. 2 sec., clock display is now in setting mode, Press Ö twice (until year flashes), Press Ö and hold down for approx. 3 seconds until } flashes in display 3 and text "RDS TIME" appears (years flash during this time), Press ;, display shows: RDS TIME 0 = Off Press ;, display shows: RDS TIME 1 = On Press Ö three times. Instruments 11:25 } 45 21 .5°C Range 257miles Picture no: 17337t.tif Board information display 3, Selecting functions Functions and settings of some equipment 3 can be accessed via the board information display. This is done via the menus and the buttons/ four-way button on the infotainment system 3 or with the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. The relevant menu options are then shown on the subsequent row of the display. Picture no: 17012t.tif Select options via the menus and with the buttons/four-way button on the infotainment system 3. Picture no: 17541j.tif Depending on the equipment level of the vehicle, menu options can be selected with the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. The relevant menu options are then shown on the subsequent row of the display. If check control 3 warning messages are displayed, the display is blocked for other functions. Acknowledge warning message by pressing the right or left side of the fourway button or by pressing the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. If there are several warning messages, acknowledge them one at a time. System settings – see page 46. Trip computer 3 – see page 48. 46 Instruments The functions are displayed in the following order: 11:25 } 21 .5°C System Picture no: 17337t.tif Board information display 3, System settings Press the Settings button of the infotainment system. Menu item Audio or System will appear. Press the lower button of the four-way button to reach menu item System. After pressing the right-hand part of the fourway button, the first function of the System menu is shown. Some information appears in the display in an abbreviated form. z z z z z z z z z Time synchronisation Time, setting hours Time, setting minutes Date, setting day Date, setting month Date, setting year Ignition logic Language selection Setting units of measure 11:25 } 21 .5°C Clock Sync.On Picture no: 17337t.tif Correcting time 3 Some RDS transmitters do not send a correct time signal. If the incorrect time is continually displayed, deactivate automatic time synchronisation 3 and set the time manually - see next page. Instruments 47 The automatic setting is indicated by } in the display. To correct time with the help of RDS, select the menu item for time synchronisation from the Settings menu. Make the desired setting. Setting date and time Select the menu item for time and date setting from the Settings menu. 11:25 } 21 .5°C Deutsch 11:25 } 21 .5°C Unit Europe-SI Make the desired setting. The setting is executed upon exit from the menu item. Ignition logic 3 See infotainment system instructions. Picture no: 17337t.tif Picture no: 17337t.tif Language selection You can select the display language for some functions. Setting units of measure You can select which units of measure are to be used. Select the menu item for language from the Settings menu and make the desired setting. Select the menu item for units of measure from the Settings menu and make the desired setting. 48 Instruments Board information display 3, trip computer 3 The trip computer provides information on driving data, which is continually recorded and evaluated electronically. Access trip computer vehicle data by pressing the BC button on the infotainment system or the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. Some information appears in the display in an abbreviated form. Once an audio function has been selected, the subsequent rows of the trip computer function are displayed. The functions are displayed in the following order: z z z z z z z Instantaneous consumption Average consumption Effective consumption Average speed Distance travelled Range Stop watch 11:25 } 21 .5°C Average consumption Display of average consumption. Calculation can be restarted at any time see next page. Inst. Consumpt. Effective consumption Fuel consumption display. The measurement can be restarted at any time - see next page. 7.6 miles/gal Average speed Display of average speed. Calculation can be restarted at any time - see next page. Picture no: 17337t.tif Stoppages in the journey with the ignition off are not included in the calculations. Instantaneous consumption Display changes depending on speed: Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h), Display in mpg below 8 mph (13 km/h). Distance travelled Display of mileage. Calculation can be restarted at any time - see next page. Instruments 11:25 } 21 .5°C 11:25 } 21 .5°C Range Stop Watch 257miles 01:22:32 h Picture no: 17337t.tif Range Range is calculated from current fuel tank content and instantaneous consumption. The display shows average values. After refuelling, the vehicle updates the range automatically after a brief delay. If less than 30 miles (50 km) can be driven with the fuel remaining in the tank, the warning "Range" appears on the display. If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven with the fuel remaining in the tank, the warning "Refuel!" 3 appears on the display. Picture no: 17337t.tif 49 Resetting trip computer information The following trip computer information can be reset (restart of measurement/ calculation): z z z z Average consumption, Effective consumption, Average speed, Distance travelled. Select the desired trip computer information. Reset using the left wheel on the steering wheel or the right/left button of the fourway button: Stop watch Operation with the four-way button: Press for more than 2 seconds current value Press right button Start/Stop, Press left button for more than 2 seconds Press for more than 4 seconds all values. Reset Interruption of power supply If the power supply has been interrupted or if the battery voltage has dropped too low, the values stored in the trip computer will be lost. Operating using the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel: Press Start/Stop. 50 Instruments Range Inst. consumpt. 19,5° 23° 5 257 miles 21.3 miles/gal Eco x 19:36 Picture no: 17329t.tif Graphical information display 3 or colour information display 3, Selecting functions The functions and settings of some equipment 3 can be accessed via the graphical information display or the colour information display. Functions are selected and executed in the menu on the display using the four-way button, the multifunction button 3 on the infotainment system or the left wheel 3 on the steering wheel. Picture no: 17012t.tif Picture no: 17013t.tif To select with four-way button: To select using the multifunction button: Select menu items via menus and with the buttons/four-way button of the infotainment system. Turn Mark menu items or commands, select functions If check control 3 warning messages are displayed, the display is blocked for other functions. Acknowledge warning message by pressing the right or left side of the fourway button. If there are several warning messages, acknowledge them one at a time. Press Select marked item, confirm command. To exit a menu, turn the multifunction button left or right to Return or Main and select. If check control 3 issues a warning message, the display is blocked from other functions. Acknowledge the message by pressing the multifunction button. If there are several warning messages, acknowledge them one at a time. Instruments 7 FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3 Settings Time, Date 51 19,5° 19:36 19:36 Language ��� 90.6 MHz Units 10 . 07 . 2004 Contrast Day / Night 19,5° Picture no: 17541j.tif To select using the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel: Turn up Previous menu item Turn down Next menu item Press Select marked item, confirm command. If check control 3 warning messages are displayed, the displaying of other messages is blocked. Acknowledge the warning message by pressing the left adjuster wheel. If there are several warning messages, acknowledge them one at a time. 19:36 Picture no: 17331t.tif For each functional area there is a main page (Main), which is selected at the top edge of the display (not with the Infotainment system CD 30 or the Mobile Phone Portal): z z z z Audio, Navigation 3, Telephone 3, Trip computer 3. For audio, navigation 3 and telephone functions 3, see infotainment system instructions. 6 Ign. logic Picture no: 17332t.tif System settings The settings are accessed via the Settings menu. Press the Main button 3 (not found on all infotainment systems) on the infotainment system (call up main display). Press the Settings button of the infotainment system. No menu may be selected with Infotainment System CD 30. The Settings menu is displayed. 52 Instruments 7 Time, Date 19,5° 19:36 Time 19:36 Date 10 . 07 . 2004 6 Synchron. clock automatical. Picture no: 17340t.tif Setting the date and time 3 Select menu item Time, Date from the Settings menu. The menu for Time, Date is displayed. Select the menu items required: Correcting time 3 For systems with GPS receiver1), time and date are automatically set upon receipt of a GPS satellite signal. If the displayed time does not correspond to local time, time can be manually corrected in 30-minute increments or automatically corrected via receipt of an RDS time signal2) 3. Some RDS transmitters do not send correct time signals. If the incorrect time is displayed often, deactivate automatic time synchronisation 3 and set the time manually. To correct time with the help of RDS, select menu item Synchron. clock automatical. from the Time, Date menu. The box in front of Synchron. clock automatical. will be ticked; see Fig. 17340 T. 7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 Time, Date Language Deutsch Units English Contrast Español Day / Night ... 6 Ign. logic Picture no: 17341t.tif Language selection You can select the display language for some functions. Select menu item Language from the Settings menu. The available languages are displayed. Make the desired setting. 1) 2) GPS = Global Positioning System, Satellite system for world-wide positioning. RDS = Radio Data System. Instruments 7 13 Languages 19,5° 19:36 X Deutsch 7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 Language ~ Europe-SI Español Units Japan Nederlands Contrast | | | Français Day / Night Italiano 6 Ign. logic Picture no: 17342t.tif Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of the menu item. In systems with voice output 3, when the language setting of the display is changed the system will ask whether the announcement language should also be changed – see Infotainment system instructions. 19,5° 19:36 Time, Date English Select the desired language. 7 Contrast 12 Great Britain USA Picture no: 17343t.tif Setting units of measure You can select which units of measure are to be used. Select menu item Units from the Settings menu. The available units are displayed. Select the desired unit. Selections are indicated by a o in front of the menu item. 53 Picture no: 17926t.tif Adjusting contrast 3 (graphical information display) Select menu item Contrast from the Settings menu. The menu for Contrast is displayed. Confirm the required setting. 54 Instruments Setting display mode 3 The display can be adjusted to suit the light conditions, black or coloured text on a light background or white or coloured text on a dark background. Select menu item Day / Night from the Settings menu. The options are displayed. Automatic: adapted based on vehicle lighting. Always day design: black or coloured text on light background. Always night design: white or coloured text on dark background. Selections are indicated by a o in front of the menu item. Ignition logic 3 See infotainment system instructions. Ü Board Computer BC 1 BC 2 Timer 19,5° 19:36 All values 1 257.0 Ø 40 8 11.0 Ø 21.3 Tyres Range 257 miles miles mph Inst. consumpt. 21.3 miles/gal gal miles/gal Picture no: 17344t.tif Graphical information display 3 or colour information display 3, Trip computer 3 The trip computers provide information on driving data, which is continually recorded and evaluated electronically. The trip computer main page provides information on range and instantaneous consumption. To display other trip computer data, press the BC button on the infotainment system 3, select the trip computer menu on the display or press the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. 19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19:36 Picture no: 17329t.tif Range Range is calculated from current fuel tank content and instantaneous consumption. The display shows average values. After refuelling, the vehicle updates the range automatically after a brief delay. Instruments Distance travelled Displays number of miles driven. Measurement can be restarted at any time, see next column. Range 30 miles OK Picture no: 17345t.tif If less than 30 miles (50 km) can be driven with the fuel remaining in the tank, the warning "Range" appears on the display. If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven with the fuel remaining in the tank, the warning "Please refuel!" 3 appears on the display. Acknowledge the menu item as described on page 50. Instantaneous consumption Display changes depending on speed: Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h), Display in mpg below 8 mph (13 km/h). Ü Board Computer Average speed Average speed calculation. Measurement can be restarted at any time, see next column. BC 1 Stoppages in the journey with the ignition off are not included in the calculations. Tyres Effective consumption Shows amount of fuel consumed. The measurement can be re-started at any time. See next column. Average consumption Calculation of average consumption. The measurement can be re-started at any time. See next column. 19,5° 19:36 All values BC 2 Timer 55 1 257.0 Ø 40 8 11.0 Ø 21.3 miles mph gal miles/gal Picture no: 17344t.tif Resetting trip computer information The following trip computer information can be reset (restart measurements): z z z z Distance travelled, Average speed, Effective consumption, Average consumption. Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer menu. 56 Instruments Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36 11.0 Ø 21.3 19,5° 19:36 All values All values 257.0 Ø 40 Ü Reset BC 1 miles mph 257.0 Ø 40 gal miles/gal Picture no: 17346t.tif The information from both trip computers can be reset separately, making it possible to evaluate data over different time periods. Select the desired trip computer information. The value for the selected function will be reset and recalculated. Ø 31.0 7.0 miles mph gal miles/gal Picture no: 17347t.tif To reset all information of a trip computer, select menu item All values. If trip computer information has been selected, "- - -" is displayed after a reset. The recalculated values are displayed after a brief delay. Interruption of power supply If the power supply has been interrupted or if the battery voltage has dropped too low, the values stored in the trip computer will be lost. Instruments 57 The desired stop watch display can be selected from the Options menu 3: Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 BC 1 BC 2 00:00:00 Timer Tyres Start Reset Options Picture no: 17348t.tif Stop watch Select menu item Timer from the Board Computer menu. The Timer menu is displayed. Driving Time excl. Stops The time the vehicle is in motion is recorded. Stationary time is not included. Driving Time incl. Stops The time the vehicle is in motion is recorded. The time the vehicle is stationary with the key in the ignition switch is included. Travel Time Measurement of the time from manual activation via Start to manual deactivation via Reset. Ü Board Computer BC 1 BC 2 Timer Tyres Picture no: 17334t.tif Display of current tyre pressure 3 Select menu item Tyres from the Board Computer menu. To start, select menu item Start. The current pressure of each tyre is displayed. To reset, select menu item Reset. Further information – see page 206. 58 Instruments Check control 3 Check control monitors several fluid levels, the tyre pressure 3, the radio remote control batteries, Vauxhall alarm system 3 and the main vehicle lighting systems, including the cables and fuses. When towing, the trailer lighting system is also monitored. Once the ignition has been switched on, all check control functions are automatically verified. Warning messages appear on the display. If there are several warning messages, they are displayed one after the other. Some information appears in the display in an abbreviated form. Examples of warning messages for the graphical information display 3 and colour information display 3 are depicted. On the board information display, messages appear in an abbreviated form. Acknowledge warning messages as described on pages 45, 50. Unacknowledged warning messages can be re-displayed later. Coolant level check Warning messages: Remote Control Battery check Remote control battery voltage is too low – see page 65. OK Picture no: 17339t.tif Brakelight switch check Fault. Brake light does not come on when brake applied. Have cause of fault remedied immediately. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Safeguard check Fault. System error in Vauxhall alarm system. Have cause of fault remedied immediately. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Instruments If there is a fault in the vehicle lighting system, the respective location of the fault is displayed as text, e.g.: Brakelight check right If brake light is defective, the relevant tail light takes over the brake light function. In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the display indicates which tyre to check, e.g.: Tyre pressure check rear right tyre (value in bar) Check tyre pressure at next opportunity using suitable gauge. Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see page 206. Checking tyre pressure – see page 299. In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system 3, if there is major loss of pressure in a tyre, the display indicates the tyre at fault, e.g.: Attention! Rear left tyre pressure loss (value in bar) Stop immediately and check tyre and tyre pressure. For tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see page 206. Wash Fluid Level check Fluid level in windscreen wash system too low. Topping up wash fluid – see page 275. Rear window wash system and headlight wash system 3 are deactivated if wash fluid level is low. Coolant level check Fluid level in engine cooling system is low. Check coolant level immediately – see page 270. Interruption of power supply Stored warning messages appear on the display one after the other. 59 Radio reception 3 Car radio reception differs from domestic radio reception: As the vehicle antenna is relatively near the ground, the broadcasting companies cannot guarantee the same quality of reception as obtained with a domestic radio using an overhead antenna. z Changes in distance from the transmitter, z multi-path reception due to reflection and z shadowing may cause hissing, noise, distortion or loss of reception altogether. 60 Instruments Picture no: 18463j.tif AUX input 3 The AUX input is in the stowage compartment in the centre console. An external audio source such as a portable CD player can be connected via the AUX input. Keep AUX input clean and dry at all times. Further information is available in the infotainment system operating instructions. Infotainment system 3 The infotainment system is operated as described in the operating instructions. Picture no: 17540j.tif Remote control for infotainment system 3 and information display The functions of the infotainment system 3 and the information display can be operated with the buttons on the steering wheel. Further information – see pages 45, 50 and the relevant operating instructions. Picture no: 17542j.tif Twin Audio 3 Twin Audio gives rear seat occupants the opportunity to listen to the audio source set on the infotainment system 3 or one of the other audio sources. Only an audio source that is not currently active on the infotainment system can be controlled using Twin Audio. Two headphone connections are available, with separate volume controls. Further information is available in the infotainment system operating instructions. Instruments Mobile telephones and radio equipment 3 The Vauxhall installation instructions and the operating guidelines provided by the telephone manufacturer must be observed when fitting and operating a mobile telephone. Failure to do so could invalidate the vehicle’s operating permit (EU Directive 95/54/EG). Recommended prerequisites for fault-free operation: Picture no: 17543j.tif Electronic data acquisition at toll systems 3 In vehicles with heat-reflecting windscreen1) 3 Attach chipcard 3 for electronic data recording and fee payment in black area of windscreen on left or righthand side behind the interior mirror, see markings in figure. Attaching the chipcard outside this area may cause data recording malfunctions. 1) Solar Reflect. z Professionally installed exterior antenna to obtain the maximum range possible, z maximum transmission power 10 Watt, 61 A hands-free attachment without an external antenna in mobile phone standards GSM 900/1800/1900 and UMTS must only be operated if the maximum transmission power of the mobile phone does not exceed 2 Watts with GSM 900 and 1 Watt in other cases. The operating regulations stipulated by the manufacturer of the telephone and the hands-free attachment must be complied with. For reasons of safety, we recommend that you do not use the phone while driving. Even use of a handsfree set can be a distraction while driving. Be sure to observe any country-specific regulations. z installation of the telephone in a suitable spot (see information on page 120). 9 Warning Obtain advice on predetermined installation locations for the external antenna and equipment holder and ways of using devices with transmission power of more than 10 Watts. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will have brackets and various installation kits available as accessories and will install them in accordance with regulations. Mobile phones and radio equipment may cause malfunctions in the vehicle electronics if they are operated in the vehicle without the external antenna unless the above-mentioned regulations are complied with. Mobile phones that do not comply with the above-mentioned mobile phone standard and radio equipment must only be operated using an antenna that is attached to the exterior of the vehicle. 62 Keys, doors, bonnet Keys, doors, bonnet Replacement keys The key is a constituent of the electronic immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer guarantees problemfree operation of the electronic immobiliser. Keep the spare key in a safe spot. Locks, see page 281. Car Pass 3 The Car Pass contains all of the vehicle’s data and should therefore not be kept in the vehicle. Electronic immobiliser.......................... Radio remote control .......................... Central locking system ........................ Fault when locking or unlocking......... Luggage compartment....................... Vauxhall alarm system 3.................... Child safety locks................................. Universal radio remote control in mirror housing 3 ............................... Bonnet .................................................. 63 64 66 69 70 74 77 77 80 Have your Car Pass on hand when consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17027t.tif Key with foldaway key section 3 Press button to extend. Press button to retract and audibly engage key section. Keys, doors, bonnet 63 If control indicator A illuminates after the engine is started, there is a fault in the engine electronics or transmission electronics 3 (see pages 37, 176, 184, 196) or there is water in the diesel fuel filter 3 (see page 270). Note The immobiliser does not lock the doors. Therefore, after leaving the vehicle always lock it and switch on the Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see pages 66, 74. Picture no: 17349t.tif Electronic immobiliser The system checks whether the vehicle may be started using the key that has been inserted. If the key is recognised as "authorised" the vehicle can be started. The check is carried out via a transponder in the key. The electronic immobiliser activates automatically when the key is removed from the ignition switch. Picture no: 17544j.tif Control indicator for immobiliser Control indicator A illuminates briefly when the ignition is switched on. If the control indicator flashes when the ignition is on, there is a fault in the system; the engine cannot be started. Switch off the ignition and then repeat the start attempt. If control indicator A continues to flash, try to start the engine using the spare key and consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 64 Keys, doors, bonnet Radio remote control Store and activate personal vehicle settings using the radio remote control The settings for the instrument illumination, the central locking system. the memory function 3 for the driver’s seat and the mirror and the climate control system 3 are stored automatically depending on the key that is used. The radio remote control is integrated in the key. Used to operate: z central locking system, z mechanical anti-theft locking system 3, z Vauxhall alarm system 3, z electrically operated tailgate 3. Different settings are stored for each remote control. Use of a remote control will activate the settings associated with it. In addition, electric windows 3 can be opened and closed using the radio remote control. The electric sun roof 3 can be closed using the radio remote control. Picture no: 17029t.tif The settings for five radio remote controls can be stored. The radio remote control has a range of approx. 3 metres. This range can be affected by outside influences. Aim the remote control at the vehicle to operate. Central locking system, see page 66. Handle the radio remote control with care, protect it from moisture and high temperatures and avoid unnecessary operation. Boot lid or tailgate, see page 70. The hazard warning lights come on to indicate that the remote control is operational. Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3, see page 66. Vauxhall alarm system 3, see page 74. Electric windows 3, see page 136. Electrically operated sun roof 3, see page 139. Keys, doors, bonnet Fault If the central locking system cannot be operated with the radio remote control, it may be due to the following: Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in accordance with environmental protection regulations. Radio remote control synchronisation After a battery change, unlock door with key in lock, see page 69. Inserting the key into the lock synchronises the radio remote control. z The range of the radio remote control has been exceeded. z Radio remote control battery voltage is too low. Battery replacement - see next page. z Frequent, repeated operation of the radio remote control outside the reception range of the vehicle (e.g. too far from vehicle, remote control is then no longer recognised). Remote control synchronisation – see next page. z If the central locking system is overloaded as a result of repeated operation at short intervals. The power supply is cut off for a brief period. z Interference from higher-power radio waves from other sources. We recommended that you have the cause of the fault remedied by your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Manual unlocking and locking using the vehicle key, see page 69. 65 Picture no: 17031t.tif Remote control battery replacement Replace the battery as soon as the range of the radio remote control begins to shrink. Extending the key – see page 62. Open the radio remote control. Replace the battery (battery type – see page 307), noting installation position. Close the radio remote control. 66 Keys, doors, bonnet Picture no: 17042t.tif Central locking system For doors, boot lid/tailgate and tank flap. To lock Press button p on radio remote control. Picture no: 17043t.tif Securing with the mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 9 Warning Do not use the system if there are people in the vehicle! The doors cannot be unlocked from inside. All doors must be closed. Press button p on radio remote control again no more than 15 seconds after locking. Lock buttons on all doors are positioned such that doors cannot be opened. If the ignition was on, the driver’s door must be opened and closed once so that the vehicle can be secured. Picture no: 16968t.tif To unlock Press button q on radio remote control. Keys, doors, bonnet Automatic locking 3 The central locking can be set to lock automatically at a certain speed. Programming unlocking mode 3 When the vehicle is delivered from the factory, the remote control is preset so that a single press of the q button opens all of the doors and the luggage compartment. The unit can be configured so that a single press of the q button unlocks the entire vehicle or just the driver’s door. Change to presetting: Hold button q on the remote control and button m in the driver’s door depressed simultaneously until a double buzzer sounds. Afterwards, only the driver’s door will be unlocked when button q is pressed once. The entire vehicle is then unlocked by pressing button q on the remote control twice. To restore the original settings, hold button q of the remote control and button m in the driver’s door depressed simultaneously until a buzzer sounds. The current setting is stored for the radio remote control, see page 64. 67 To activate the function, hold button p of the remote control and button m in the driver’s door depressed simultaneously until a double buzzer sounds. Picture no: 17866j.tif Central locking switch for locking and unlocking the doors from inside the vehicle Press button m in the driver’s door: Doors and luggage compartment are locked. Press button ) in the driver’s door: Doors and luggage compartment are unlocked. In the estate with electrically operated tailgate 3, the doors and luggage compartment are locked and unlocked with button m. When the mechanical anti-theft locking system is active 3, see page 66, the doors cannot be unlocked with this button. If the vehicle is locked using the remote control, buttons m and ) in the driver’s door are inoperable. The doors and luggage compartment are unlocked by switching off the ignition or by pressing button ) or, for estate with electrically operated tailgate 3, by pressing button m in the driver’s door. Individual doors can be unlocked by pulling the lock button. To deactivate the function, hold button p of the remote control and button m in the driver’s door depressed simultaneously until a buzzer sounds. The current setting is stored for the radio remote control, see page 64. 68 Keys, doors, bonnet Note z If the driver’s door is not closed properly, the central locking system will unlock again immediately after locking. On vehicles with electric windows, the windows can be opened and closed from outside: Hold down button q or p on the remote control until all windows are open or fully closed. z 30 seconds after unlocking using the radio remote control the doors automatically lock again 3 if neither a door nor the luggage compartment has been opened. The sun roof can be closed from outside: Hold down button p on the remote control until the sun roof is fully closed. Version with electrically retractable exterior mirrors 3: The mirrors are retracted/extended when the windows are closed/opened with the remote control. z To lock the doors from within (e.g. to prevent undesired access from outside), press the central locking switch m. z If they are locked, the doors and the luggage compartment unlock automatically in the event of an accident of a certain severity (to permit outside assistance). – Prerequisite: Ignition must not be switched off. Picture no: 17046t.tif Window and sliding roof operation 3 from the outside. 9 Warning Take care when operating the electric windows and the sun roof. Risk of injury, particularly to children. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly. Keep a close watch on the windows and sun roof when closing them. Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them as they move. If the mirrors are retracted using the button in the driver’s door, they remain in this position when the windows are opened. Keys, doors, bonnet Automatic closing 3 If the mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 is activated, the electronic windows and sun roof 3 are automatically closed and the electrically retractable exterior mirrors 3 are automatically retracted as soon as the rain sensor 3 detects water on the windscreen. To safeguard the battery from discharge by the rain sensor 3, after four hours the windows and sun roof 3 are automatically closed and the electrically retractable exterior mirrors 3 are automatically retracted. For further information on windows and the sun roof – see pages 138, 141. Fault If the central locking system cannot be operated with the radio remote control, it may be due to the following: z If the central locking system is overloaded as a result of repeated operation at short intervals. The power supply is cut off for a brief period. z Defective fuse in fuse box – see page 246. Consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer to have the cause of the fault remedied. Operating the driver’s door with the key see next section. 69 Malfunction in central locking system To unlock Insert key into driver’s door lock and turn forwards as far as it will go. Turn key back to a vertical position and remove. The other doors can be unlocked by pulling the interior lock button (unless the mechanical anti-theft locking system has been enabled 3). The luggage compartment and the fuel filler cap remain locked. Picture no: 17546j.tif Fault when locking or unlocking Radio remote control fault To unlock Insert key into lock in driver’s door and turn forwards as far as it will go. Turn key back to vertical position and remove from lock. Unlock driver’s door with central locking switch, see page 67. The mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 and the Vauxhall alarm system 3 are deactivated when the key is inserted in the ignition switch. To lock Open front passenger door, close driver’s door, lock vehicle using central locking switch, see page 67, close front passenger door. To lock Lock front passenger door and rear doors by pushing the interior lock button. Lock driver’s door with key in lock. Turn key towards rear of vehicle as far as it will go, turn key to a vertical position and remove. The unlocked fuel filler cap and the luggage compartment cannot be locked. 70 Keys, doors, bonnet Picture no: 16968t.tif Luggage compartment To unlock Press button q on radio remote control. Picture no: 17503j.tif To open The luggage compartment of the saloon is opened by pushing the button, and the luggage compartment of the estate is opened by pulling the catch beneath the handle. Illumination of s indicates the the luggage compartment is open. For notes on open luggage compartment lid, paying attention to open tailgate – see page 73. Electrically operated tailgate 3 - see next page. Picture no: 17547j.tif To close There is a handle on the inside of the luggage compartment lid or tailgate for closing the luggage compartment. With the estate, do not operate the catch beneath the handle when closing. Otherwise the luggage compartment will be unlocked again. Keys, doors, bonnet 71 Electrically operated tailgate, estate 3 In vehicle with an electrically operated tailgate the tailgate can be electrically opened and closed after unlocking. 9 Warning Make sure there is 2.03 m clearance before operating the electric tailgate. Observe the pivoting zone of the tailgate during operation and do not enter the pivoting zone. Picture no: 17042t.tif To lock Press button p on the radio remote control – or – Central locking switch m in driver’s door press when doors are closed. To open Unlock the vehicle by pressing button q on the remote control. The tailgate is opened electrically by pulling the button beneath the handle. – or – Picture no: 17548j.tif Briefly press button r of the remote control to unlock the tailgate (the doors remain locked). Pull the button under the handle to open the tailgate electrically – or – Hold button r of the remote control depressed for more than 1 second (the doors remain locked)to electrically unlock and open the tailgate – or – 6 72 Keys, doors, bonnet Picture no: 17867j.tif With the key in the ignition switch and the hand brake applied, hold button x in the driver’s door depressed for approx. 1 second. The tailgate opens electrically. Picture no: 17548j.tif To close Hold button r on the remote control depressed until the tailgate is closed. – or – With the key in the ignition switch, press button x in the driver’s door until the tailgate is closed. – or – Picture no: 17549j.tif Press button F in the tailgate. The tailgate closes electrically. To lock, press button p on the radio remote control. Tailgate opening and closing is indicated by the rear turn signal lights flashing three times. If the luggage compartment is not closed within 20 minutes of opening, the button in the tailgate is deactivated. Keys, doors, bonnet Interruption of tailgate opening/closing procedure Tailgate opening/closing can be immediately interrupted by briefly pressing button x in the driver’s door – or – Pressing button r on the remote control – or – Pressing the exterior button beneath the handle – or – Pressing button F in the tailgate. Safety function The tailgate has an obstruction detection facility. If the tailgate encounters resistance during the automatic closing movement, the closing procedure is stopped immediately and the tailgate is slowly opened again. The tailgate remains in this position for 10 second and then slowly reopens. Fault in electrically operated tailgate If the electronic drive should fail, the tailgate can be opended and closed manually, although more force is required to close the tailgate. Vehicles with towing equipment 3: When towing a caravan or trailer, the tailgate cannot be operated using button r on the remote control or button x in the driver’s door. Opening the tailgate when the doors are locked via the central locking system If the doors are locked via the central locking system, the tailgate can be opened by pressing the button r on the remote control and pulling the catch beneath the handle. 73 Open boot lid, open tailgate 9 Warning Do not drive with the boot lid or tailgate open or ajar, e.g. when transporting bulky objects, since toxic exhaust gas could penetrate the interior. Also, the number plate of the estate cannot be clearly read unless the luggage compartment is closed. Fitting accessories to the boot lid or tailgate will increase its weight. If it becomes too heavy, the boot lid or tailgate will then not stay open. 74 Keys, doors, bonnet Vauxhall alarm system 3 monitors z the doors, luggage compartment, bonnet, z the passenger compartment, z vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised, z the ignition. 9 Warning Do not use the system if there are people in the vehicle! The doors cannot be unlocked from the inside. Picture no: 17043t.tif Picture no: 17550j.tif To activate All doors, windows, the sun roof 3 and the bonnet must be closed. Press button p on the radio remote control. Activation without monitoring of passenger compartment and vehicle tilt e.g. if animals are to be left in the vehicle. If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s door must be opened and closed again so that the Vauxhall alarm system can be activated again. 2. Press button Ä, LED in button flashes (maximum of 10 seconds), see next page. 1. Close tailgate and bonnet. 3. Close doors. 4. Switch on Vauxhall alarm system. LED illuminates. After approx. 10 seconds the system is activated, without monitoring of the passenger compartment or vehicle tilt. LED flashes until system is switched off. Keys, doors, bonnet 75 After the first 10 seconds of the Vauxhall alarm system activation: z LED flashes slow = z LED illuminates for approx. 1 second = System switched on, Switch-off. If a system fault occurs, consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17551j.tif Light emitting diode (LED) During the first 10 seconds of the Vauxhall alarm system activation: z LED illuminated = Test, switch-on delay, z LED flashes rapidly Door, luggage compartment, or bonnet open, system fault, = Picture no: 16968t.tif To deactivate Press button q on the remote control – or – switch on the ignition. If there is a fault in the radio remote control, unlock vehicle as described on page 69. If the alarm is triggered when the driver’s door is opened, deactivate the Vauxhall alarm system by switching on the ignition. 76 Keys, doors, bonnet 3. After the luggage compartment is closed, monitoring of the passenger compartment, luggage compartment and vehicle tilt is reactivated after a 5 minute delay and the tailgate is locked. To override the delay, press button p on the remote control. Note Changes to the vehicle interior, such as the use of seat covers, could impair the function of passenger compartment monitoring. Alarm An alarm can be triggered whilst the Vauxhall alarm system is active: z an acoustic signal (horn) and z a visual signal (hazard warning lights). The number of alarms and the duration thereof are stipulated by law. Picture no: 17548j.tif Estate with electrically operated tailgate 3:: To open and close the luggage compartment when the Vauxhall alarm system is active 1. Briefly press button r on the remote control – luggage compartment is unlocked (see page 70), and monitoring of the passenger compartment and vehicle tilt is disabled. 2. Opening luggage compartment – see page 70. The alarm can be interrupted by pressing a button on the remote control or by switching on the ignition. Pressing button q or switching on the ignition will deactivate the Vauxhall alarm system at the same time. Keys, doors, bonnet 77 The programmed universal radio remote control can replace the individual remote control units of the systems to be operated. Three buttons on the underside of the mirror housing can be used to operate various systems. Consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer for details on compatible systems. 9 Warning Picture no: 17052t.tif Child safety locks 9 Warning Use the child safety lock whenever children are occupying the rear seats. Disregard may lead to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly. Turn rotary knob at rear door lock from the vertical position using key: door cannot be opened from inside. Picture no: 17552j.tif Universal radio remote control in mirror housing 3 to operate up to 3 different remotely operated systems (e.g. garage door, domestic alarm system, domestic exterior lighting). Ensure that no persons, animals or objects are in the movement zone of the system to be operated (e.g. a garage door). Vehicle passengers should be informed of the hazards. 78 Keys, doors, bonnet Basic programming of the universal radio control system 1. Switch on ignition. 2. When programming for the first time, press both outer buttons under the mirror housing, until the control indicator alongside the buttons flashes rapidly. 3. Hold the manual remote control unit at a distance of 0 to 30 cm from the control button area of the mirror housing. 4. Press the button on the manual remote control unit while pressing and holding the desired button of the universal radio remote control. 5. The control indicator in the mirror housing will flash slowly at first. As soon as it flashes rapidly, release both buttons. The universal radio control system is now programmed for the chosen system. 6. To program other buttons with other systems, repeat steps 3 to 5. If a system cannot be operated after repeated programming, and the control indicator flashes rapidly for a short time after the relevant button has been pressed and then illuminates for 2 seconds, the receiver may be equipped with a variable code system, see next page. Programming the universal radio control system for variable code systems 1. Perform basic programming – see previous column. 2. Activate synchronisation mode of system (see system manufacturer’s system operating manual) and briefly press the pre-programmed button on the universal radio remote control three times within 30 seconds. 3. The radio control system is now programmed for variable code systems. To program other systems for variable codes, repeat steps 1 and 2 for the other buttons of the universal radio remote control system. Keys, doors, bonnet Using the universal radio control system With the ignition on, press the required universal radio control button, and the control indicator in the mirror housing will illuminate. The pre-programmed system can now be operated using the universal radio control system. Reprogramming individual button settings If a button that has already been programmed is to be used for a different system, repeat steps 3 to 5 of the basic programming procedure described previously. 79 Clearing down all programmed button settings Before selling the vehicle, it is a good idea to erase button settings. Note Keep replaced manual transmitters for possible reprogramming. The manual transmitters can also continue to be used. Button settings can only be erased all at once. It is not possible to erase individual button settings. Buttons can, however, be individually reprogrammed, see "Reprogramming individual button settings". If after repeatedly performing the above steps a system fails to respond to the universal radio control, consult a workshop. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. In order to erase the programming of all 3 buttons, press both outer buttons and release as soon as the LED begins to flash (after approx. 20 seconds). All button settings have now been cleared and can be programmed anew at any time. During programming, the vehicle should be within the range of the receiver. Under no circumstances should the vehicle be in the movement zone of a system (e.g. garage door). Do not programme an system without an automatic safety stop (manufactured before April 1982). Take note of the system manufacturer’s safety instructions for drives and manual remote control units. 80 Keys, doors, bonnet Bonnet Picture no: 17553j.tif To open the bonnet, pull the release lever located on the driver’s side below the instrument panel. The bonnet will then be unlocked and will partially open. Return release lever to its original position. Picture no: 17554j.tif Picture no: 17555j.tif There is a safety catch on the underside of the bonnet: lift this upwards and open the bonnet. To hold the bonnet open, insert the support located on the left side in the small slot on the underside of the bonnet. When the bonnet is opened, snow or dirt on the bonnet can slide down and obstruct the air intake. Air intake – see page 168. Before closing, fasten the support in its retainer. Lower the bonnet and allow it to fall into its catch. Check that the bonnet is locked in position by pulling at its front edge. If it is not engaged, repeat the procedure. Seats, Interior Seats, Interior 81 Push passenger seat as far back as possible. The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back (recommended tilting angle approx. 25°). Head restraints .................................... Armrest 3 between the front seats .... Rear seat armrest ................................ Electrically adjustable front seats 3 .. Travel Assistant 3 ............................... Luggage compartment extension ..... Luggage compartment cover 3......... Safety net 3, Estate............................. Lashing eyes ........................................ Reversible carpet 3 ............................. FlexOrganizer 3................................... Notes on loading the vehicle.............. Cigarette lighter 3............................... Accessory socket 3.............................. Ashtray ................................................. Stowage compartments...................... Drink holders ........................................ Sun visors.............................................. 82 83 84 84 87 94 95 96 98 98 98 100 101 101 102 103 105 105 9 Warning Failure to observe the descriptions could lead to injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly before starting off. Picture no: 17350t.tif Front seat adjustment See page 3. Seat position Adjust driver’s seat such that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the area of its upper spokes with the driver’s arms slightly bent. 82 Seats, Interior Picture no: 17055t.tif Head restraints The middle of the head restraint should be at eye level. If this is not possible for extremely tall persons, set to highest position, and set to lowest position for small persons. 9 Warning Disregarding the instructions can lead to injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly before setting off. Setting – see page 6 and right hand column. Picture no: 16976t.tif Picture no: 17556j.tif To adjust front head restraints (all variants) and outboard rear head restraints 3 To adjust, press button on side and adjust height. Adjusting the rear head restraints 3 that are integrated in the rear seat backrest To adjust head restraints, pull forwards with both hands and slide up or down. In order to increase the size of the luggage compartment or if they are not being used, push rear head restraints down as far as possible, see page 94. To increase the size of the luggage compartment or improve visibility, push head restraint down as far as possible if seat is unoccupied. If seats are occupied, pull head restraints upwards. If seat is occupied, pull head restraint upwards. Seats, Interior Picture no: 17056t.tif Removing the head restraints Press and release the two catches. Pull and remove the head restraint. In order to increase the size of the luggage compartment or if they are not being used, push rear head restraints down as far as possible, see page 94. Picture no: 17557j.tif Armrest 3 between the front seats The armrest can be pushed forward. If the armrest is not required, push it back. Picture no: 17558j.tif 83 The armrest contains a stowage compartment: to open, slide armrest back, press button at front and lift. 84 Seats, Interior Electrically adjustable front seats 3 9 Warning Care must be taken when operating the electrically adjustable seats. There is a risk of injury, particularly for children, and a danger that articles could become trapped. Keep a close watch on the seats when adjusting them. Picture no: 17559j.tif Rear seat armrest The armrest can be folded down. If the rear centre seat is being used or the rear seat backrests are being folded down, fold armrest upward. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly. Picture no: 17579j.tif Adjustment The seat position can be adjusted by means of switches on the outboard side of the seats. Adjusting the inclination move switch 1 upwards/downwards at front. Seats, Interior 85 Adjusting the longitudinal position move switch 1 forwards/backwards. Height adjustment move switch 1 upwards/downwards at rear. Seat back adjustment turn switch 2 forwards/backwards. Operate switch until desired seat position is reached. Seat position – see page 81. After adjusting the seat, adjust height of seat belt – see page 109. Picture no: 17580j.tif Electrically operated lumbar support 3 on driver’s seat Adjust lumbar support using four-way switch on outboard side of driver’s seat. Adjust lumbar support to suit personal requirements. Moving support up and down: push button up or down. Increasing and decreasing support: push button forward or backward. Thigh support 3 on driver’s seat see page 4. Picture no: 17582j.tif Memory function 3 for electrically adjustable driver’s seat and exterior mirrors Three different seat and mirror settings can be stored (e.g. for three drivers). 6 86 Seats, Interior Readiness for operation Storing settings z With ignition on, 1. Adjust seat, z within 10 minutes of switching ignition off, 2. adjust exterior mirror – see page 6, z within 10 minutes of opening or closing the driver’s door, z within 10 minutes of inserting or removing the ignition key. Readiness for operation stops when the vehicle is locked. 3. press memory button M and the position button to be used (1, 2 or 3) simultaneously, and storage is acknowledged by an acoustic signal. Retrieving settings Keep position key 1, 2 or 3 pressed until the stored seat and mirror positions have been reached. Store and activate the settings using the remote controls 3 When the vehicle is locked using the radio remote control the current driver’s seat and exterior mirror positions are stored, see page 64. The seat adjusting procedure can be stopped immediately by operating a setting button. Passenger side mirror with mirror parking assistance 3 see page 6. For reasons of safety, seat adjustment stops immediately if the position button is released or one of the setting buttons is operated. Overload If the seat setting is electrically overloaded, the power supply is automatically cut off for a short time. Adjustments may only be performed with vehicle stationary. The system is protected by fuses in the fuse box – see page 246. Seats, Interior Picture no: 17560j.tif Travel Assistant 3 The Travel Assistant Contains z z z z z z Armrest Stowage compartments Waste container Drink holders Accessory sockets Connection console e.g. for DVD player 3 z Electric cool box z Tables z Twin Audio (rear audio module) 3 or stowage compartment The Travel Assistant is installed on a console above the middle seat in the rear. Picture no: 17561j.tif Installing The Travel Assistant Swivel out retaining device on seat with strap. Insert the two rear retainers of the connecting console in the retaining device on the seat and engage. 87 Picture no: 17562j.tif Swivel open and hold cover of front attachment points in floor in front of console. 6 88 Seats, Interior Picture no: 17563j.tif Swivel connecting console downward and engage in attachment points. Picture no: 17564j.tif Swivel the locking lever downwards. Check the locking position of the Travel Assistant: The red mark (see Fig. 17566 J) must not be visible. Otherwise, lock using the key – see page 92, Fig. 17575 J. Remove cap 3 from plug at securing bracket. Picture no: 17565j.tif To lock, insert Travel Assistant into recesses in connecting console and slide back as far as possible. Seats, Interior Picture no: 17566j.tif If it is correctly locked, the red mark must no longer be visible in the window, otherwise the procedure must be repeated. 9 Warning If it is not correctly locked, the Travel Assistant could be propelled forward with considerable force when hard braking occurs, risk of injury. Picture no: 17567j.tif Drink holder and accessory sockets Open the drink holder by pressing the marking. Only accessories with maximum power consumption of 120 Watts must be connected to the accessory sockets. For notes – see page 101. 89 Picture no: 17568j.tif Stowage compartments The lower stowage compartment is opened by pressing the mark. The underside of the compartment has an opening through which objects in the compartment can be raised. The upper stowage compartment is located under the armrest. To open, press the button and fold the armrest upwards. 90 Seats, Interior Picture no: 17569j.tif Connecting console for DVD player 3 When not in use, pull connecting console upward, press button and slide downward. Picture no: 17570j.tif Swivel up the display holder, slide DVD player display into bracket from below and fix in position with bracket. Maximum load: 1 kg. Picture no: 17571j.tif Electric cool box To open, fold open the armrest together with the stowage compartment. Seats, Interior Picture no: 17572j.tif Switch on the cool box as needed. Picture no: 17573j.tif 91 Picture no: Tables Fold armrest upward (1). Set required clearance by adjusting longitudinal position of table (4). Use recessed grip to pull table upwards as far as it will go (1), swivel table forward (2) and fold downwards (3). Swivel armrest down. 6 92 Seats, Interior Picture no: 17574j.tif To fold away the table, swivel the armrest up. Push the table forward as far as it will go (1). Picture no: Fold the table upwards past the resistance point (2), swivel it downwards and insert in the Travel Assistant (3). Swivel armrest down. Picture no: 17575j.tif Dismantling the Travel Assistant Open catch using key, red mark appears in window. Seats, Interior Picture no: 17576j.tif Pull the Travel Assistant to the front on the connecting console and remove. Fit cap 3 to plug on securing bracket. Picture no: 17577j.tif Press the locking lever down, press the button on the front of the connecting console and swivel the locking lever upwards. Picture no: 17578j.tif 93 Swivel the connecting console upward and pull it from the retaining device on the seat. Swivel the retaining device back on the seat. 94 Seats, Interior Picture no: 17583j.tif Luggage compartment extension Fold down the cover behind the arm rest Fold down the armrest on to the seat cushion, pull the handle and tilt the cover forwards. The outer seats can continue to be used for passengers. 9 Warning The load must not obstruct the operation of the handbrake and the gears. Pay attention to notes on page 100. Engage the cover behind the centre armrest audibly in position. Picture no: 17584j.tif Picture no: 17585j.tif Cover behind armrest can be locked from luggage compartment 3: turn handle 90°: Folding down the rear seat backrests Push the rear head restraints right down. Locked = Unlocked = Place the belt buckles in storage pockets in the seat cushions. Handle horizontal Handle vertical Slide front seat forward slightly. Remove Travel Assistant 3 – see page 89. Unlock one or both rear seat backrests by depressing pushbuttons and fold down on to seat cushion. Return front seat to desired position. Seats, Interior Picture no: 17586j.tif Restoring backrest to an upright position Audibly engage the rear seat backrests. There is a locking indicator on the release lever. If the rear seat backrests have been correctly locked the red indicator on the release levers must not be visible. Picture no: 17587j.tif Folding down the front passenger seat 3 Push head restraint on front passenger’s seat down as far as it will go. Slide front passenger seat backwards. Fold front passenger seat forward by raising release lever. To restore, press the release lever forward, restore the front seat backrest to an upright position and audibly engage. Notes on loading see page 100. Picture no: 17588j.tif 95 Luggage compartment cover 3 5-door hatch To remove, unhook the retaining straps from the tailgate. Pull cover from the side guides. Fit in reverse order. 96 Seats, Interior Picture no: 17589j.tif Picture no: 17590j.tif Picture no: 17591j.tif Estate To close Pull luggage compartment cover towards rear of vehicle using handle and hook into side retainers. Removing Open luggage compartment cover. Safety net 3, Estate Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged objects on the cover. Move release lever on right side of luggage compartment cover upward. Lift right cover and remove from brackets. The safety net can be fitted behind the rear seats or, with the rear seat backrests folded down, behind the front seats. Fitting Fit the luggage compartment cover in the bracket on the left-hand side, fold up the release lever on the right-hand side, fit the luggage compartment cover in the bracket on the right-hand side and press the release lever closed. Passengers must not be carried behind the safety net. To open Remove luggage compartment cover from side brackets. It rolls up automatically. Fitting behind the rear seats Remove the luggage compartment cover see left column. Fit the cassette with rolled safety net into the side brackets and engage by twisting. Seats, Interior Picture no: 17592j.tif Extend the net from the cassette. The roof frame houses two fitting openings. Fit the net rod in the fitting opening on one side and then the other and engage by pushing forward. Fit the luggage compartment cover. Picture no: 17593j.tif 97 Picture no: 17594j.tif Removing Remove the luggage compartment cover. Pull each side hook from the cassette and attach it to an eye 3 in the vehicle floor. Detach the safety net rod from the brackets in the roof frame. Slide both latches inwards; push the cassette with rolled net rearwards in the bracket, twist and remove upwards. Extend the net from the cassette. The roof frame houses two fitting openings. Fit the net rod in the fitting opening on one side and then the other and engage by pushing forward. Fitting behind front seats Fold both rear seat backrests. Place the rolled net on the floor behind the front seats in such a way that the cog rail in the slit on the net is to the rear. Undo the side hooks from the eyes 3 in the vehicle floor. Removing Detach the safety net rod from the brackets in the roof frame. 98 Seats, Interior Picture no: 17595j.tif Picture no: 17596j.tif Picture no: 17597j.tif Lashing eyes FlexOrganizer 3 The figures show some possible uses. These enable cargo to be secured in position in the luggage compartment using lashing straps 3 or a luggage net 3. Flexible system for dividing the luggage compartment or securing loads in an estate. Reversible carpet 3 The components are housed in a stowage compartment at the rear in the load floor, see page 104. Variable partition wall Fig. 17596 J. Press the rods of the partition wall together slightly and engage in the desired guide rail openings in the side walls. The rods can be engaged in various positions. Folding floor covering with two different surfaces. When transporting objects in the luggage compartment, fold reversible carpet with appropriate surface on top. The system consists of z variable partition net z variable partition wall z partition rod z mesh pockets for the side walls z hooks The components can be mounted in the two guide rails in the side walls of the luggage compartment. Variable partition net Fig. 17597 J. Push rods of partition net together a little and insert into relevant openings in side wall guide rails. The rods can be engaged in various positions. The partition net can be installed horizontally or vertically at different heights. Seats, Interior Picture no: 17598j.tif Hooks and mesh pockets for the side walls Fig. 17598 J. Engage the hooks in the openings of the guide rails in the side walls as indicated in the figure and turn 90°. The mesh pockets can be hung from the hooks. Picture no: 17599j.tif Removing Press together the rods of the partition wall/net or the telescopic rods and remove from the guide rails. Turn the hooks 90° and remove. FlexOrganizer stowage The FlexOrganizer components are housed in a stowage compartment at the rear in the load floor. To open, raise the handle and open the flap – see page 104, Fig. 17611 J. Picture no: 17600j.tif 99 To stow away, pull partition rods, partition net rods and separate telescopic rod apart in the middle and fold the two halves together, see figure 17599 J. Roll up partition and partition net and place in compartment with other components. Close lid. 100 Seats, Interior Notes on loading the vehicle z Objects must not be stored in the airbag inflation area, because they could cause injury if the airbag inflates. z Heavy objects in the luggage compartment should be placed against the engaged rear seat backrests or, if the rear seat backrests are folded down, against the front seat backrests. If objects are to be stacked, the heavier objects should be placed at the bottom. Unsecured objects in the luggage compartment would be thrown forward with great force in the event of heavy braking, for example. z Secure heavy objects with lashing straps 3 attached to lashing eyes – see page 98. If heavy loads slip when the vehicle is braked heavily or driven around a bend, the handling of the vehicle may change. z Saloon: loose objects in the luggage compartment should be secured against slipping using a luggage net 3 – see page 98. z Estate: mount the safety net 3 when transporting objects in the luggage compartment. See page 96. z Estate: close the luggage compartment cover so there is no reflection in the rear window. z When transporting objects in the luggage compartment the rear seats must be engaged, see page 94. z The load must not obstruct the operation of the pedals, the handbrake or the gears or restrict the driver’s freedom of movement. Do not place loose objects in the interior. z Do not drive with luggage compartment open when transporting bulky objects, for example, since toxic exhaust fumes could penetrate the interior. Picture no: 17601j.tif z Do not allow the load to protrude above the upper edge of the rear seat backrests, or above the upper edge of the front seat backrests if the rear seat backrests are folded down. z Weights, payload and roof load – see page 293. z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit 3 must always be freely accessible. z Driving with a roof load – see pages 186, 189, 220, increases the sensitivity of the vehicle to cross-winds and has a detrimental effect on vehicle handling owing to the vehicle’s higher centre of gravity. z Do not place any objects in front of the rear window or on the instrument panel. They are reflected in the glass, obstruct the driver’s view and will be thrown through the vehicle, for instance in the event of heavy braking. Failure to observe these descriptions can lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly. 9 Warning Seats, Interior Picture no: 17602j.tif Picture no: 17603j.tif Cigarette lighter 3 Accessory socket 3 In front centre console. The socket in the centre console and the cigarette lighter socket can be used to connect electrical accessories. The sockets are ready for operation when the ignition is switched on. If the engine is not running the battery will be discharged. An additional accessory socket 3 can be found in the centre console beneath the rear air vents and in the Travel Assistant 3. Press in cigarette lighter with ignition switched on. Switches off automatically once the element is glowing. Pull out lighter. Estates have an additional accessory socket 3 to the left in the luggage compartment next to the luggage compartment lighting. 101 Picture no: 17604j.tif Do not damage the sockets by using unsuitable plugs. The maximum power consumption of electrical accessories must not exceed 120 watts. Do not connect any current-delivering accessories, e.g. electrical charging devices or batteries. Electrical accessories connected to the socket must comply with the electromagnetic compatibility requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839, otherwise vehicle malfunctions may occur. Accessory sockets in the Travel Assistant 3, see page 89. 102 Seats, Interior Ashtray Picture no: 17605j.tif To be used only for ash and not for combustible rubbish. 9 Warning Failure to observe these descriptions can lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly. Ashtray, front The cover opens when pressed at the point indicated. Picture no: 17606j.tif To empty, grip both sides of the ashtray insert at the spots illustrated and pull upwards. Picture no: 17607j.tif Rear ashtray 3 In the rear centre console. The cover opens when pressed at the point indicated. To empty: open the ashtray, press the spring (arrow) and pull out the ashtray. Seats, Interior Picture no: 17608j.tif Stowage compartments Glove compartment To open, pull handle upwards. At the front of the opened cover there is a pen holder. Cooled glove compartment 3 – see page 146. Picture no: 17614j.tif Centre console stowage compartment 3 Division of the stowage compartment can be changed by moving the partition in the side guides. 103 Picture no: 17609j.tif Stowage compartment in the roof lining 3 To open, press the point indicated. The maximum permitted load on the stowage compartment is 0.4 kg. The stowage compartment must be closed whilst driving. 104 Seats, Interior Picture no: 17610j.tif Stowage compartments in the luggage compartment To access press down bar and open the cover. Warning triangle ¨ 3 and first-aid kit + 3 stowage – see page 234. Stowing the spare wheel – see page 236. Jack and vehicle tools stowage – see page 238. Picture no: 17611j.tif Estates have an additional stowage compartment in the load compartment floor. To open, pull the release lever and open the flap. Picture no: 17612j.tif When opening, ensure that the hinge at the fold is opened and that the entire floor covering is not raised. Seats, Interior 105 Sun visors Use the sun visor to protect from glare by pulling it down and swivelling it to the side. Picture no: 17613j.tif Drink holders Drink holders, front 3 The drink holder can be found between the front seats in the centre console: slide cover 3 open. Picture no: 17615j.tif Drinks holders, rear 3 The drink holder can be found beneath the centre seat: pressing front edge moves drink holder out. Drink holder in Travel Assistant 3 – see page 89. 106 Safety systems Safety systems Three-stage safety system Comprising: z Three-point seat belts. z Belt tensioners at the front seats. Seat belts.............................................. Three-point seat belts ......................... Belt tensioners...................................... Using the belts ..................................... Testing the belts .................................. Vauxhall Full Size airbag system ....... Mounting brackets 3 for ISOFIX child restraint systems ............................... Child restraint systems 3 .................... Exterior mirrors..................................... Aspherical exterior mirror 3 ............... Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror 3 and exterior mirror 3 on the driver’s side ................................. Sun visors, glove compartment .......... Head restraints .................................... Safety accessories 3 ........................... 107 107 107 109 110 111 123 124 126 126 126 126 127 127 z Airbag systems for driver, front passenger and outboard rear seats 3. The three stages are activated in sequence depending on the severity of the accident: z The automatic seat belt locking devices prevent the belt strap from being pulled out and thus ensure that the vehicle occupants are retained in their seats. z The front seat belt buckles are pulled downwards. As a result, the seat belts are instantaneously tightened and the occupants decelerate with the vehicle at a very early stage, which reduces the stress placed on the body. z The airbag systems are also triggered in the event of serious accidents and form a safety cushion for the occupants. Depending on the severity of the accident, the front airbags inflate in two stages. 9 Warning The airbag systems serve to supplement the three-point seat belts and belt tensioners. The seat belts must therefore always be worn. Disregard of these instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly. Please read the instructions provided with the child restraint system! Safety systems 107 Seat belts 9 Warning Always wear your seat belt, and that means also in urban traffic and when you are a rear seat passenger. It can save your life! Pregnant women must always wear a seat belt – see page 109. In the event of an accident, persons not wearing seat belts endanger their fellow occupants and themselves. Picture no: 17515j.tif Control indicator X for the seat belt – see page 36. For information on correct seating position – see pages 81, 110, 113. Seat belts are only intended for one person. They are not suitable for anyone under 12 years of age or under 150 cm tall. The belt has a "vehicle sensitive retractor" which is designed to lock during heavy acceleration or deceleration in any direction. For children up to 12 years of age, we recommend the Vauxhall child restraint system – see page 124. Three-point seat belts The vehicle is equipped with three-point seat belts with automatic retractors and locking devices, allowing freedom of body movement although the spring tensioned belts always ensure a snug fit. Belt tensioners The front seat belt systems are equipped with belt tensioners. In the event of a headon or rear-end collision of a certain severity, the belt buckles are pulled down, therefore tightening the belts. Picture no: 17616j.tif Actuation of belt tensioners is indicated by illumination of control indicator v, see next page. The belt tensioners must be replaced after activation. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If the seat belts are undamaged the operation thereof is unaffected, even if the belt tensioners have been triggered. Further information – see page 110. 108 Safety systems 9 Warning Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Have your Car Pass on hand when consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17617j.tif Control indicator v for belt tensioners The operation of the belt tensioners is electronically monitored together with the airbag systems and indicated on the instrument panel by the control indicator v. When the ignition is switched on, the control indicator illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go off after 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in the belt tensioner system or the airbag systems, see page 117. The belt tensioner or the airbag systems may not activate if an accident occurs. Deployment of the belt tensioners is indicated by continuous illumination of v. If control indicator v in the instrument panel fails, for reasons of safety, the text AIrbAG appears in the odometer display. Pressing the reset button will cause the text to disappear. It then reappears in the odometer display 10 seconds later. Important z Accessories and other objects not specifically approved for your vehicle type must not be affixed or placed within the action zone of the belt tensioners (near the belt buckles) as this could result in injury if the belt tensioners are triggered. z Do not make any modifications to the components of the belt tensioners, as this will render the vehicle unroadworthy. 9 Warning Improper handling (e.g. removal or installation) can activate the belt tensioners risk of injury. z The belt tensioner and airbag system control electronics can be found in the centre console area. In order to avoid malfunctions, do not store magnetic objects in this area. z We recommend that you have the front seats removed by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z The belt tensioners only actuate once. Please replace belt tensioners that have been triggered. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z Applicable safety directives must always be observed when disposing of the vehicle. For this reason, disposal should be performed by an authorised recycling company. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Safety systems Picture no: 17106t.tif Using the belts Fitting seat belts Pull the belt out of the retractor and guide it across the body, making certain that it is not twisted. Insert the latch plate into the buckle. The front seat backrest must not be tilted back too far or the seat belt will not operate properly. The recommended angle of inclination is 25°. Make sure that the lap belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly across the body. Tension the belt frequently while driving by tugging the diagonal part of the belt. Picture no: 17107t.tif 9 Warning On pregnant women in particular, the lap belt must be positioned as low as possible across the pelvis so as not to put too much pressure on the abdomen. Bulky clothing prevents the belt from fitting properly. The belt must not rest against hard or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing (e.g. ballpoint pens, keys, spectacles) because these could cause injury. Do not place any objects (e.g. handbags, mobile phones) between the belt and your body. 109 Picture no: 17618j.tif Height adjustment of seat belt upper anchorage point: 1. Pull belt out slightly. 2. Front seat belts Push button down or slide belt guide up. Rear seat belts Push belt guide and slide it upwards or downwards. 3. Set desired height. 4. Allow belt guide to audibly engage. Do not adjust height while driving. 6 110 Safety systems Testing the belts Please check all parts of the belt system occasionally for damage and correct operation. Have damaged parts replaced. In case of an accident, please replace overstretched belts and triggered belt tensioners. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Do not perform any alterations on the belts, their anchorages, the automatic retractors or the belt buckles. Picture no: 17515j.tif Adjust height such that the belt passes over the wearer’s shoulder and rests against the shoulder. It must not pass over the neck or upper arm. Picture no: 17109t.tif Removing the belt To remove the belt, depress the red pushbutton on the buckle; the belt will retract automatically. Make sure that belts are not damaged or trapped by sharp-edged objects. Safety systems Picture no: 17619j.tif Vauxhall Full Size airbag system The Vauxhall Full Size airbag system comprises several individual systems. Front airbag system The front airbag system will be triggered in the event of a serious accident involving a frontal impact and forms safety cushions for the driver and front passenger. The forward movement of the driver and front passenger is checked and the risk of injuries to the upper body and head thereby substantially reduced. Picture no: 17110t.tif Side airbag system 3 The side airbag is triggered in the event of a side-on collision to form a safety cushion for the driver or front passenger in the respective door area. This substantially reduces the risk of injury to the upper body and pelvis. Picture no: 17620j.tif 111 Curtain airbag system 3 The curtain airbag system triggers in case of a side-on collision and provides a safety barrier in the head area on the respective side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of injury to the head considerably in case of a side-on collision. 112 Safety systems Exception: Passenger seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3. The seat occupancy recognition system deactivates the front and side airbags on the passenger side if the front passenger seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 has been fitted to the front passenger seat. Seat occupancy recognition – see page 118. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – see page 124. Picture no: 17111t.tif Picture no: 17621j.tif Vauxhall Full Size airbag system z seat occupancy recognition 3, Front airbag The front airbag system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the steering wheel and above the glove compartment. z the control indicator for Vauxhall child restraint systems y with transponders 3 in the instrument panel. The front airbag system comprises: z an airbag with inflator in the steering wheel and a second one in the instrument panel, z control electronics with impact sensors, z the airbag systems control indicator v in the instrument panel, The front airbag system will be triggered: z depending on the severity of the accident, z depending on the type of impact, z within the range shown in the illustration, z independent of side airbag and curtain airbag system 3. Examples of events triggering the front airbag system: z Impact against a non-yielding obstacle: the front airbags are triggered at low vehicle speed. z Impact against a yielding obstacle: (such as another vehicle): the front airbags are only triggered at a higher vehicle speed. Safety systems Picture no: 17619j.tif Picture no: 17350t.tif No impairment of view will occur, because the airbags inflate and deflate so quickly that it is often not even noticed in an accident. The front airbag system provides optimum protection when the seat, backrest and head restraint are correctly adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat according to the occupant’s height such that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the area of its upper spokes with the driver’s arms slightly bent. The front passenger’s seat should be as far back as possible, with the backrest upright – see pages 3, 81. Do not place the head, body, hands or feet on the covers of the airbag systems. When triggered, the front airbags inflate in milliseconds to form a safety cushion for the driver and front passenger. The forward movement of the front seat occupants is checked, thereby substantially reducing the risk of injury to the upper body and head. 9 Warning Do not place any objects in the area in which the airbags inflate. Important information – see page 120. 113 Picture no: 17515j.tif 9 Warning The three-point seat belt must be correctly fitted – see page 109. The front airbag system will not be triggered in the event of z the ignition is switched off, z minor frontal collisions, z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a side or rear impact, that is to say, if it would not be of benefit to the occupants. 6 114 Safety systems 9 Warning Seat belts must therefore always be worn. The front airbag system serves to supplement the three-point seat belts. If you do not wear your seat belt you risk being seriously injured, or even thrown from the vehicle, in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident the belt helps to keep you in the correct seating position, so that the front airbag system can provide you with effective protection. In addition, the front airbag system will not be triggered for the front passenger in versions with seat occupancy recognition 3 if z the front passenger seat is unoccupied, z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3. Seat occupancy recognition – see page 118. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – see page 124. Picture no: 17622j.tif Side airbag 3 The side airbag system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the front seat backrests. The side airbag system comprises: z an airbag with inflator in the back of the driver’s and front passenger seat respectively, z the control electronics, z the side impact sensors, z the airbag systems control indicator v in the instrument panel, z seat occupancy recognition 3, z the control indicator for Vauxhall child restraint systems y with transponders 3 in the instrument panel. Picture no: 17623j.tif The side airbag system will be triggered: z depending on the severity of the accident, z depending on the type of impact, z within the range shown in the illustration on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or front passenger side, z independently of the front airbag system. Exception: Passenger seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3. The seat occupancy recognition system deactivates the passenger front and side airbags if the passenger seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 has been fitted to the passenger seat. Seat occupancy recognition – see page 118. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – see page 124. Safety systems 9 Warning There must be no objects in the area in which the airbag inflates or in the area between the backrests and the vehicle body. Do not place the hands or arms on the covers of the airbag systems. Important information – see page 120. The three-point seat belt must always be correctly fitted – see page 109. Picture no: 17110t.tif When triggered, the side airbag inflates within milliseconds to form a safety cushion for the driver or front passenger in the respective door area. This substantially reduces the risk of injury to the upper body and pelvis in the event of a side-on collision. The side airbags will not be triggered in the event of z the ignition is switched off, z frontal collisions, z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a rear impact, z collisions involving a side impact outside the passenger cell. 115 In addition, the side airbag system will not be triggered for the front passenger in versions with seat occupancy recognition 3 if z the front passenger seat is unoccupied, z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3. Seat occupancy recognition – see page 118. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – see page 124. 116 Safety systems Picture no: 17624j.tif Picture no: 17623j.tif Curtain airbag 3 The curtain airbag system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim. The curtain airbag system will be triggered: The curtain airbag system comprises: z depending on the type of impact, z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame on the driver’s and front passenger side respectively, z the control electronics, z the side impact sensors, z the airbag systems control indicator v in the instrument panel. z depending on the severity of the accident, z within the range shown in the illustration on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or front passenger side, z together with the side airbag system, z irrespective of seat occupancy recognition, z independently of the front airbag system. Picture no: 17620j.tif When the curtain airbag is triggered it inflates within milliseconds and provides a safety barrier in the head area on the respective side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of injury to the head considerably in case of a side impact. Safety systems 9 Warning 9 Warning There must be no objects in the area in which the airbag inflates. Do not place the hands or arms on the covers of the airbag systems. Important information – see page 120. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Have your Car Pass on hand when consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The three-point seat belt must always be correctly fitted – see page 109. The curtain airbags will not be triggered in the event of z the ignition is switched off, z frontal collisions, z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a rear impact, z collisions involving a side impact outside the passenger cell. 117 Picture no: 17617j.tif Control indicator v for airbag systems The operation of the airbag systems is electronically monitored together with the seat occupancy recognition systems 3 and the belt tensioners and indicated on the instrument panel by the control indicator v. When the ignition is switched on, the control indicator illuminates for approx.4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go off after 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in the airbag systems, the seat occupancy recognition system 3 or the belt tensioners, see page 108. The systems may not activate if an accident occurs. Deployed airbags are indicated by continuous illumination of v. If control indicator v in the instrument panel fails, for reasons of safety, the text AIrbAG appears in the odometer display. The text is acknowledged by pressing the reset button. It then disappears from the odometer display 10 seconds later. 118 Safety systems Seat occupancy recognition 3 The seat occupancy recognition system deactivates the front and side airbags for the front passenger if the front passenger seat is not occupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 is fitted on the front passenger seat. The curtain airbag system 3 remains activated. The control indicator for seat occupancy recognition y is located in the instrument panel. If control indicator y illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is switched on, the vehicle is equipped with seat occupancy recognition; see next page, Fig. 17626 J. If a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 is installed, the control indicator y illuminates continuously as soon as the system has detected the child restraint system when the ignition is switched on. Only then can a child restraint system be used on the front passenger seat. 9 Warning Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can be fitted on the front passenger seats. Use of systems without transponders poses a risk of fatal injury. Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can be identified by a sticker. Picture no: 17625j.tif Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition can also be identified by the sticker on the side of the instrument panel, see figure above. Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 are automatically detected if correctly fitted to the front passenger seat. When these child restraint systems are being used on the front passenger seat, the front and side airbag systems for the front passenger seat are deactivated. The curtain airbag system remains activated. Pay attention to control indicator seat y for occupancy recognition 3, see page 119. Safety systems Control indicator y for Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 The presence of a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 is indicated by the steady glow of control indicator y in the instrument panel once the ignition has been switched on and the seat occupancy recognition system has detected the child restraint system. 119 If the control indicator flashes even though there is correctly installed child restraint system with transponders 3, there is a fault and risk of injury to the child. Fit child restraint system to rear seat. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17626j.tif If the control indicator does not illuminate whilst driving, the front and side airbag have not been deactivated on the passenger side. Risk of fatal injury to the child – fit child restraint system to rear seat. Have cause of fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If the child restraint system is not correctly fitted or the transponders are defective the control indicator flashes. Check that child restraint system is correctly fitted. For fitting child restraint system with transponders 3, see instructions provided with child restraint system. If no Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 is installed, the control indicator must neither illuminate nor flash, since this indicates that the front passenger airbag systems would not be triggered. Have the cause of fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 9 Warning If the Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 has been fitted according to the instructions, the control indicator for Vauxhall restraint systems with transponders must illuminate in the instrument panel when the ignition is switched on. If the control indicator does not illuminate whilst driving, the airbag systems have not been deactivated on the passenger side. Risk of fatal injury. In this case, fit child restraint system to rear seat. Have cause of fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 120 Safety systems Important z Do not fit accessories or place objects in the expansion zone of the airbag systems - risk of injury if airbags are deployed. z Do not place any objects between the airbag systems and the vehicle occupants; danger of injury. 9 Warning Never carry child restraint systems or other objects on your lap - risk of fatal injury. z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to hang up light articles of clothing or coat hangers. Do not place any objects in the pockets of the hanging items – risk of injury. z The airbag systems and belt tensioner control electronics can be found in the centre console area. In order to avoid malfunctions, do not store magnetic objects in this area. z Do not stick anything on the steering wheel, instrument panel, front seat backrests or roof frame in the vicinity of the airbags, or on the front passenger seat cushion, or cover any of those areas with other materials. z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to clean the steering wheel, instrument panel, front seat backrests, roof frame and seat cushion of the front passenger seat. Do not use any aggressive cleaning agents. z Only protective covers which are approved for your Vectra with side airbag may be fitted on the front seats. When fitting the protective covers, make sure that the airbag units on the outboard sides of the front seat backrests are not covered. z The airbag systems are triggered independently of each other based on the severity of the accident and the type of impact. The side airbag system 3 and the curtain airbag system 3 are triggered together. z Each airbag can be triggered only once. Once triggered, an airbag must be replaced without delay. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z The speeds, directions of movement and deformation properties of the vehicles, and the properties of the obstacle concerned, determine the severity of the accident and triggering of the airbags. The degree of damage to your vehicle and the resulting repair costs alone are not indicative that the criteria for triggering of the airbags were met. z Do not perform any alterations on the components of the airbag system, as this would render the vehicle unroadworthy. 9 Warning The systems can be triggered abruptly and cause injury if they are handled improperly. z We recommend having the steering wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling parts, the door seals, the handles and the seats removed by your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z Applicable safety directives must always be observed when disposing of the vehicle. For this reason, disposal should be performed by an authorised recycling company. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should only travel on the rear seats. This does not apply to children who are travelling in child restraint systems with transponders 3. Safety systems z In vehicles with seat occupancy recognition 3, do not place any heavy objects on the front passenger seat otherwise the airbag systems for the front passenger seat may be triggered in the event of an accident. 9 Warning z In vehicles with seat occupancy recognition 3, to prevent malfunctions do not use protective covers or seat cushions on the front passenger seat. z In order to prevent malfunctions when using a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 on the front passenger seat, no objects (e.g. plastic sheet, stickers or heated mats) may be placed under the child restraint system. 9 Warning Child restraint systems as well as other objects must never be carried on the lap of passengers; risk of fatal injury. If carried in this way, child restraint systems with transponders 3 in vehicles with seat occupancy recognition 3 could lead to front passenger airbag systems not being triggered in the event of an accident. 121 Picture no: 17424t.tif Use of child restraint systems 3 on the front passenger seat in vehicles with airbag systems 3, but without seat occupancy recognition 3 Vehicles with passenger airbag and no side airbag 3: child seats facing the rear of the vehicle must not be fitted to the passenger seat, risk of fatal injury. Child seats facing the front (child safety seats for weight ranges I, II and III – see following pages) are permitted on the passenger seat, providing that it is pushed back as far as possible and the backrest has been adjusted so that the lap belt fits snugly. 122 Safety systems Picture no: 17118t.tif Vehicles with front passenger airbag can be recognised by the word AIRBAG above the glove compartment and the warning sticker on the sun visor of the passenger seat - see Fig. 17424 T. In some versions1), the warning sticker may be on the side of the instrument panel - see Fig. 17118 T. Picture no: 17627j.tif 9 Warning Vehicles with side airbag 3: No child restraint system 3 may be fitted on the front passenger’s seat; risk of fatal injury. A vehicle with side airbags can be identified by the word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the front seat backrests. Seat occupancy recognition 3 – see page 118. 1) Country-specific version. Picture no: 17625j.tif Use of child restraint systems 3 on front passenger seat in vehicles with airbag systems 3 and with seat occupancy recognition 3 9 Warning Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can be fitted on the front passenger seats. Use of systems without transponders poses a risk of fatal injury. Safety systems 123 Mounting brackets 3 for ISOFIX child restraint systems The brackets located between the backrest and seat cushion are used for mounting ISOFIX child restraint systems. Please follow the instructions accompanying the ISOFIX child restraint system. Only ISOFIX child restraint systems approved for the vehicle may be used. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17626j.tif Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition can be identified by the control indicator y in the instrument panel. If the control indicator y illuminates for approx. 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the vehicle is equipped with seat occupancy recognition – see page 118. Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition can also be identified by the sticker on the side of the instrument panel, see Fig. 17625 J. The seat occupancy recognition system detects Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 and switches off the front and side airbag systems for the front passenger’s seat. The curtain airbag system remains activated. Seat occupancy recognition – see page 118. Picture no: 17424t.tif Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can be identified by a sticker or badge. 124 Safety systems Child restraint systems 3 The Vauxhall child restraint system is designed specifically for your Vauxhall and thus provides optimum safety for your child in the event of impact. If a different child safety seat is used, follow the manufacturers’ instructions for fitting and use. The country in which you are travelling may not permit the use of child restraint systems on certain seats. Always comply with the local or national regulations. Selecting the right system Your child should be transported facing rearward in the car as long as possible. Change the system when the height of the child is such that the head extends over the top of the system and is no longer supported at eye level. The child’s cervical vertebrae are still very weak. In the event of an accident, they are subjected to less stress in the semi-prone rearward position than when upright. 9 Warning Never carry child restraint systems on your lap, risk of fatal injury. Permissible options for fitting a child safety seat1) Weight and age class2) 0: up to 10 kg or approx. 10 months On front passenger seat On outboard rear seats On centre rear seat B 1, + U, + U B 2, + U, + U X U U 0+: up to 13 kg or approx. 2 years I: 9 to 18 kg or approx. 8 months to 4 years II: 15 to 25 kg or approx. 3 to 7 years III: 22 to 36 kg or approx. 6 to 12 years 1) 2) For reasons of safety, we recommend that the child safety seat be installed on one of the outboard rear seats. We recommend the use of each system until the child reaches the upper weight limit. Safety systems B1 = Limited, only with seat occupancy recognition and Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders. If the child restraint system is being secured using a three-point seat belt, move seat height adjustment 3 to uppermost position. Move front passenger seat as far back as possible and move front passenger seat belt anchorage point to lowest position. B2 = Limited, only with seat occupancy recognition and Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders. If the child restraint system is being secured using a three-point seat belt, move seat height adjustment 3 to uppermost position. Move front passenger seat as far back as possible so that vehicle safety belt runs from anchorage point towards the front. U = Can be used universally in combination with a three-point seat belt. + = Vehicle seat with ISOFIX mounting available. When mounting with ISOFIX, only ISOFIX child restraint systems that have been approved for the vehicle may be used. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. X = No child restraint system permitted. 125 Note z Children under 12 years or under 150 cm tall should only travel in an appropriate child safety seat. z When transporting children, use the child restraint systems suitable for the child’s weight. z Ensure that the child restraint system has been correctly fitted, see instructions provided with child restraint system. z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint system can be wiped clean. z Do not stick anything on the child restraint systems and do not cover them with any other materials. z Only allow the child to enter and exit on the side of the vehicle facing away from the road. z A child restraint system which has been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. 126 Safety systems The mirrors do not dip to prevent dazzle if: z the ignition is switched off, z reverse gear is engaged or selector lever set to R, z the interior lights are on, z a door is open. Adjusting interior and exterior mirrors – see page 6. Automatically regulated centre console lighting, see page 134. Picture no: 17628j.tif Exterior mirrors For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior mirrors will swing out of their normal mounting position if they are bumped with sufficient force. Reposition the mirror by applying slight pressure to the mirror housing. Aspherical exterior mirror 3 increases the field of view. Estimating the distance away of vehicles following you is only possible to a limited extent because of slight distortion. Picture no: 17629j.tif Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror 3 and exterior mirror 3 on the driver’s side Dazzle at night is automatically reduced. For vehicles with position memory for electrically operated front seats 3 the sensor is in the top right-hand side of the mirror. Sun visors, glove compartment The mirror covers in the sun visors and the glove compartment should be closed whilst driving. Safety systems 127 Head restraints Safety accessories 3 Adjust head restraints in accordance with height 3, see pages 5, 82. The wide range of Vauxhall accessories allows you to equip your Vectra in accordance with your own wishes. In addition to safety accessories, items for improving comfort and a complete range of vehicle care products you will find many articles which will be of great value to you when needed. Do not attach objects or components that are not approved for the Vectra to the head restraints. These affect the protective effect of the head restraints and can be propelled through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner if the driver brakes hard or an accident occurs. "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" are the guarantee of top quality and an accurate fit. Picture no: 17011t.tif Active head restraints 3 In the event of a rear-end impact, the active head restraints automatically tilt forwards. The head is more effectively supported by the head restraint and the danger of whiplash in the area of the neck is reduced. Active head restraints are identified by the lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint guide sleeves. Your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be happy to advise you, for example with regard to: z Vauxhall child restraint systems, z Tow ropes, z Tow rods, z Jump leads, z Spare bulb kit, z Spare fuse kit, z Halogen fog lights, z Mud flaps, z Warning triangle, z First-aid kit, z First-aid kit (cushion). 128 Lighting Lighting Versions with daytime running lights 3: Parking lights are on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to 7 or AUTO. Dipped beam is on when the engine is running. The daytime running lights switch off when the ignition is switched off. Automatic dipped beam activation 3 Fog lights > 3 ..................................... Fog tail light r .................................... Turn signals, hazard warning flashers Reversing lights.................................... Headlight range adjustment ? .......... Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) .. Door-to-door illumination ................... Parking lights ....................................... Instrument illumination k, Information display illumination...... Courtesy light ....................................... Battery discharge protection.............. Light covers.......................................... Headlights when driving abroad ....... 129 130 130 130 130 129 131 132 132 133 133 134 134 135 Follow the regulations of the country in which you are driving when using daytime running lights and fog lights 3. Picture no: 17122t.tif Exterior lights Turn light switch: 7 = Off 8 = Parking lights 9 = Dipped beam, main beam Dipped beam, main beam and headlight flash, see pages 14. In positions 8 and 9, the tail lights and number plate lights are also on. If the ignition is switched off with the dipped beam or main beam on, the parking lights illuminate 3 and the dipped beam switch off. The rear lights of the estate automatically switch themselves off after 10 minutes if the luggage compartment is open and the vehicle is stationary. Driving abroad – see page 135. Lighting 129 Vehicles without automatic level control z Front seats occupied = 0 z All seats occupied = 1 z All seats occupied and luggage compartment load = 2 z Driver’s seat occupied and luggage compartment load = 3 Vehicles with automatic level control 3 Picture no: 17123t.tif Automatic dipped beam activation 3 Light switch to AUTO: Dipped beam switches on or off automatically when the engine is running based on outside light conditions. The exterior lights are turned off by removing the ignition key. For reasons of safety, the light switch should always remain in the AUTO position. z Front seats occupied = 0 z All seats occupied = 0 Picture no: 17125t.tif z All seats occupied and luggage compartment load = 0 Manual headlight range adjustment 3 With dipped beam switched on, push to release knob and adjust headlight range in four steps to suit vehicle load. Turn wheel against resistance and click it to the required position. z Driver’s seat occupied and luggage compartment load = 1 Headlight range adjustment ? Correct adjustment of the headlight range reduces dazzle for other road users. Level control system – see page 206. Automatic headlight range adjustment 3 On vehicles with Xenon headlights, the range of the headlights is adjusted automatically based on vehicle load. 130 Lighting Fog tail light r On = Off = Press r, r illuminates in instrument panel Press r again or switch ignition or light off The fog tail light can only be switched on when the ignition is on and dipped beam or parking lights are on or if the light switch is in the AUTO 3 position and dipped beam is active. Picture no: 17124t.tif Fog lights > 3 On = Off = Press >, > illuminates in instrument panel Press > again or switch ignition or light off The fog lights can only be switched on when both the ignition and lights are on. The fog tail lights of the vehicle are deactivated when towing a caravan/ trailer. Turn signals, hazard warning flashers see pages 14, 15. Reversing lights Come on when reverse gear is engaged and ignition is switched on. Lighting Picture no: 17793j.tif Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights, improves illumination of z curves (curve lighting), z intersections and tight turns (turn lighting). Curve lighting 1 The Xenon light beam pivots based on steering wheel position and speed (from approx. 6 mph / 10 km/h). The headlights shine at an angle of up to 15° to the right or left of the direction of travel. Picture no: Turn lighting 2 An additional light comes on at certain steering wheel settings (after approx. 90°), turn signal settings and speeds (up to approx. 25 mph / 40 km/h). The light shines approx. 90° to the left or right of the vehicle and approx. 30 metres to the front. Motorway lighting At higher speeds and continuous straight ahead travel, the dipped beam automatically raises slightly, thereby increasing headlight range. 131 Picture no: 17630j.tif Control indicator B Lights: Fault in system. The system is not ready for operation. If the curve lighting swivelling device fails, the relevant dipped beam is switched off. The corresponding fog light is automatically switched on for reasons of safety. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If control indicator B illuminates for approx. 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the headlights have been set to symmetrical dipped beam, see "Headlights when driving abroad", page 135. 132 Lighting If the driver’s door is left open, the lights will go out after two minutes. The light is switched off immediately by inserting the key into the ignition or pulling the turn signal stalk again with the driver’s door open. Picture no: 17128t.tif Picture no: 17129t.tif Door-to-door illumination Parking lights The dipped beam and the reversing lights illuminate for approx. 30 seconds after the driver has exited the vehicle and closed his door. The front parking light and tail light of one side of the vehicle can be activated when parking: To activate function: 1. Switch off ignition. 2. Ignition off. 2. Remove ignition key. 3. Open driver’s door. 4. Pull turn signal stalk toward steering wheel. 5. Close driver’s door. 1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3. 3. Move turn signal stalk all the way up (right parking light) or down (left parking light). An acoustic signal sounds and control indicator O illuminates briefly in the instrument panel to indicate activation. Remove the ignition key before leaving the vehicle. To switch it off, switch on the ignition or move the turn signal stalk in the opposite direction. Lighting Picture no: 17130t.tif Instrument illumination k, Information display illumination Brightness can be adjusted when the exterior lights are on: Push to release knob k and then turn it clockwise or anticlockwise and hold until the desired brightness is obtained. Display mode 3 – see page 54. Picture no: 17631j.tif Courtesy light Front courtesy light Comes on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control, when a door is opened or after switching off the ignition and removing the key from the ignition switch. Goes off automatically with delay after the doors are closed or immediately when the ignition is switched on or the doors are locked. Manual operation from inside with doors closed: On = Off = Press button c Press button c again Picture no: 17632j.tif 133 Front reading lights 3 Left and right reading lights are individually operable. With ignition on: On = Off = Press button a Press button a again 134 Lighting Entry lighting 3 After unlocking the vehicle, the instrument and switch illumination as well as the courtesy lights come on for a few seconds. Illuminated mirror in the sun visors 3 The lighting switches on when the cover is opened. Glove compartment lighting Glove compartment is illuminated when lid is open and ignition on. Picture no: 17133t.tif Cigarette lighter and ashtray illumination 3 Comes on when ignition is switched on. Courtesy lights and rear reading lights 3 Centre switch position: The rear courtesy light comes on together with the front one when a door is opened. Luggage compartment lighting 3 Comes on when the boot lid/tailgate is opened. The rear reading lights on the left and right can be switched on separately. With ignition on: Automatically regulated centre console lighting 3 Spotlight in housing of interior mirror. On = Off = Daylight-dependent, automatically regulated centre console lighting with ignition switched on. Switch position I Switch position 0 Battery discharge protection To prevent the battery from becoming discharged, the courtesy light, reading lights, luggage compartment lighting and glove compartment lighting switch off automatically 5 minutes after the ignition is switched off. Light covers The inside of the light covers may become misted up for a short period during unfavourable weather conditions, heavy rain or after washing the vehicle. The misting disappears automatically after a short time, but can be speeded up by switching the lights on. Lighting Headlights when driving abroad The asymmetrical dipped beam increases the field of vision on the passenger side of the lane. This causes glare for oncoming traffic if the vehicle is driven in countries where traffic drives on the opposite side of the road. Do as follows to prevent glare: Vehicles with halogen headlight system or xenon headlight system, without Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) Have the headlights adjusted by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 135 Vehicles with Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) 1. Open fuse box cover in engine compartment, see page 250. 2. Insert any fuse (maxi-fuse) 3 in slot 37. Fuse assignment – see page 251. 3. Close fuse box. 4. Switch on ignition. Then the AFL control indicator B illuminates for 4 seconds whenever the ignition is switched on. Control indicator B, see pages 38, 131. 136 Windows, Sun Roof Windows, Sun Roof 9 Warning Caution when operating the electric windows 3 and the electric sun roof 3. Risk of injury, particularly to children. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly. If there are children on the rear seat, switch on the child safety system 3 for the electric windows. Electric windows 3............................... Windows in rear doors ........................ Sun roof 3 ............................................ Electrically operated rear window blind 3 ............................................... Roller blinds at rear door windows 3. 136 138 139 141 141 Keep a close watch on the windows and sun roof when closing them. Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them as they move. Electric windows 3 The electric windows can be used z with ignition on, z within 10 minutes of switching ignition off, z within 10 minutes of opening or closing the driver’s door, z within 10 minutes of inserting or removing the ignition key. Readiness for operation stops when the vehicle is locked. Windows, Sun Roof Picture no: 17868j.tif Operation via 2 rocker buttons in the driver’s door. Additional rocker buttons in the front passenger door and the rear doors 3. To operate window in stages, tap switch. For automatic opening or closing, keep switch pressed for slightly longer; to stop window movement, tap switch again. Picture no: 17869j.tif Vehicles with rear 3 electric windows have a slide switch between the buttons in the driver’s door z Up: The front windows can be operated using the buttons. z Down: The rear windows can be operated using the buttons. Safety function If the window glass encounters resistance above the middle of the window during automatic closing, it is immediately stopped and the window opened again. If the windows do not move easily (e.g. on account of frost), keep pressing the switch for the window in question until the window has been closed in stages. 137 Picture no: 17870j.tif Child safety system for rear windows 3 Switch z in the driver’s door z press (switch z illuminates in red): rear windows cannot be operated using the buttons in the rear doors, z press again (switch z no longer illuminates in red): rear windows can be operated using the buttons in the rear doors. 138 Windows, Sun Roof Automatic closing 3 see page 69. Overload If the windows are repeatedly operated at short intervals, the power supply is briefly cut off. The system is protected by fuses in the fuse box – see page 246. Fault The windows cannot be automatically opened or closed. Activate electronic windows as follows: 1. Close doors. 2. Switch on ignition. 3. Window completely open. 4. Close window and press on button for at least 3 seconds. 5. Repeat for each window. Picture no: 17046t.tif Operating windows from outside The windows can be opened and closed using the radio remote control. To open Press button q until the windows are open. To close Press button p until the windows are closed. Picture no: 17636j.tif Windows in rear doors Turn hand crank 3 towards the front or rear. Windows, Sun Roof Sun roof 3 139 z within 10 minutes of switching ignition off, To raise Turn the rotary switch to any position between d and e. The sun roof will automatically move to the desired position. When the switch is in position e, the sun roof is fully raised. z within 10 minutes of opening or closing the driver’s door, To lower Turn rotary switch to d. z within 10 minutes of inserting or removing the ignition key. Position memory After the ignition has been switched on, the sun roof can be automatically returned to its last position by briefly pressing the rotary switch. The electric sun roof can be operated z with ignition on, Readiness for operation stops when the vehicle is locked. Picture no: 17637j.tif Operated using rotary switch in the overhead control panel. To open Turn the rotary switch to any position between d and ü. The sun roof will automatically move to the desired position. When the switch is in position ü, the sun roof is fully opened. Comfort position Set rotary switch to position f. With the roof in this position, wind noise is reduced. To close Turn rotary switch to d. 140 Windows, Sun Roof Safety function If the sun roof encounters resistance during automatic closing, it is immediately stopped and opened again, as long as the vehicle is stationary. 9 Warning If when the vehicle is being driven the sun roof encounters resistance during automatic closing, because of the higher closing forces involved the protective function cannot be guaranteed, and there is a risk of injury. If the sun roof movement is stiff, e.g. due to frost, turn rotary switch to d and keep it pressed until the sun roof is closed. Automatic closing 3 see page 69. Sun shade To reduce the sunlight in the interior with the sliding roof closed or raised. Open or close sun shade as required. When the sun roof is opened, the sun shade is also opened. Picture no: 17638j.tif Closing sun roof from outside To close the sun roof with the radio remote control: Press button p until the sun roof is closed. If the windows are to be closed from outside the vehicle, but the sun roof is to be left open, briefly press the rotary switch before switching off the ignition. Windows, Sun Roof 141 Overload If the system is overloaded, the power supply is automatically cut off for a short time. Fault If the sun roof no longer assumes the desired position automatically, program sun roof electronics as follows: 1. Switch on ignition. 2. Press the rotary switch until the sun roof is shut, then keep it pressed for at least a further 3 seconds. 3. Turn rotary switch to ü and keep it depressed until the sun roof is open. 4. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it depressed until the sun roof is closed. 5. Turn rotary switch to e and leave there until the sun roof is fully raised. 6. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it depressed until the sun roof is closed. Picture no: 17639j.tif Picture no: 17640j.tif Electrically operated rear window blind 3 Roller blinds at rear door windows 3 Reduces intensity of sunlight shining on to rear seats. Operation with ignition switched on. To reduce sunlight at the rear seats. To raise To lower = = Press N Press N again Do not operate blind if there are objects lying in front of the rear window. Pull the blind upwards using the grip and engage it at the top in the door frame. 142 Climate control Climate control Air vents ............................................... Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors ..................... Heated front seats 3........................... Heated rear seats 3 ............................ Driver’s seat with climate control 3 ... Cooled glove compartment 3 ............ Heating and ventilation system ......... Air conditioning system 3................... Automatic air conditioning system 3 Electronic climate control system 3 ... Auxiliary heating/ventilation 3 .......... Air intake .............................................. Air outlet............................................... Pollen filter ........................................... General information ............................ Maintenance ........................................ 144 145 145 145 146 146 147 150 152 158 165 168 168 168 168 169 Picture no: 17641j.tif Heating and ventilation system, air conditioning system 3 Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 are combined into one unit that is designed to provide comfort regardless of the season, weather or outside temperature. When cooling 3 is activated, the air is cooled and dried. The heating unit heats the air as required in all operating modes depending on the position of the temperature switch. The air supply can be adjusted to suit requirements by means of the fan. Picture no: 17642j.tif Vehicles without an air conditioning system do not have buttons for cooling n, recirculation 4 or demisting and defrosting V. Air conditioning system 3 – see page 150. Climate control 143 The set values appear on the information display. Electronic climate control system – see page 158. Picture no: 17643j.tif Picture no: 17675j.tif Automatic air conditioning system 3 Electronic climate control system 3 Provides a comfortable interior regardless of the weather, outside temperature or season. Offers the greatest comfort in the vehicle interior regardless of the conditions outside. When an interior temperature is set with the temperature control, the temperature and amount of inflowing air are automatically regulated. A uniform, comfortable climate in the vehicle is thereby automatically obtained based on outside climate conditions. To ensure a uniform and comfortable climate in the vehicle, the temperature of inflowing air, air-flow rate and air distribution are automatically adapted based on the climate conditions outside the vehicle and the current temperature of the vehicle interior. Automatic air conditioning system – see page 152. 144 Climate control Picture no: 17645j.tif Air vents Pleasant ventilation to the head area controlled by the position of the temperature switch. To increase the air supply, set the fan to a higher speed and set the air distribution switch to M. Centre and side air vents (1) To open vent: Turn vertical adjuster wheel up. Adjust the direction of air flow by turning the horizontal and vertical adjuster wheels. Picture no: 17646j.tif To close the vents turn the adjustment wheel fully downwards. Windscreen defroster nozzles (2) Air distribution switch to l or J: Air flows onto windscreen and side windows. Additional vents can be found beneath the windscreen and the side windows, and also in the footwell. Picture no: 17647j.tif Rear air vents 3 To open vent: Turn vertical adjuster wheel all the way up. Adjust quantity of air by rotating the control wheel. The air flow can be directed as desired by tilting and swivelling the slats. To close the vents turn the adjustment wheel fully downwards. If the rear seats are unoccupied close the rear nozzles to increase the air supply at the front. Climate control Picture no: 17651j.tif Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors Picture no: 17648j.tif 145 Picture no: 17649j.tif Heated front seats 3 Heated rear seats 3 Operation with ignition switched on: Two knurled wheels beneath the centre air vent for the left and right-hand seats. Two switches at rear of centre console in front of the rear seats. Press Ü Press Ü again Turn relevant wheel to set required heating level. Operation with ignition switched on: On Off = = Control indicator in the button. Control indicator above adjustment wheel. Heating takes place with the engine running and is switched off automatically after approximately 15 minutes. We do not recommend prolonged use of the highest level for people with sensitive skin. The heated rear window automatically switches on when the diesel particle filter is being cleaned 3 depending on the engine. To switch off, set wheel to 0. Heating only with ignition switched on. On Off = = Press ß Press ß again Control indicators in switches. The outboard seats are heated. 146 Climate control General information, as well as information on air intake, air outlet, pollen filter and maintenance, see pages 168, 169. Picture no: 17650j.tif Driver’s seat with climate control 3 Knurled wheel at driver’s side below centre air vents. Move knurled wheel to required ventilation or heating setting as per requirements. Control indicator above adjustment wheel. We do not recommend prolonged use of the highest heating level for people with sensitive skin. To switch off, set wheel to 0. Function only available with ignition switched on. Picture no: 17652j.tif Cooled glove compartment 3 Cooled air is fed into the glove compartment through a nozzle. If glove compartment cooling is not needed, turn the wheel downwards. Climate control Picture no: 17653j.tif Heating and ventilation system Left-hand rotary switch: Air distribution L to head area above adjustable air vents and to foot well M to headroom via adjustable air vents l to the windscreen and front door windows J to the windscreen, front door windows, to foot well K to foot well Open the air vents when the switch is set to L or M. Picture no: 17654j.tif Centre rotary switch: Temperature red zone = warm blue zone = cold 147 Picture no: 17655j.tif Right-hand rotary switch: air flow Four fan speeds: x Fan off 4 Highest speed The rate of air flow is determined by the fan. The fan should therefore also be switched on during a journey. 148 Climate control Heating The amount of heat is dependent on the coolant temperature and is thus not fully attained until the engine is warm. The comfort and general well-being of the vehicle occupants are to a large extent dependent on a suitable ventilation and heating setting. For rapid warming of the passenger compartment: z Set the air distribution switch to the desired position – see page 147. To obtain temperature stratification in the vehicle with a pleasant "cool head and warm feet" effect, move the rotary air distribution switch to K or J, move the rotary temperature switch to the central position and open the centre air vents. z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as far as it will go (warm). z Set the fan to speed 3. Picture no: 17656j.tif Ventilation z For maximum ventilation in head area: set air distribution switch to M and open all vents. z For ventilation to foot well: Set air distribution switch to K. z For simultaneous ventilation to the head area and the foot well: set air distribution switch to L. z Set the temperature to the desired setting. z Set the fan to the desired setting. The passenger compartment is heated more rapidly by an electric auxiliary heater in vehicles with Quickheat 3. Climate control 149 z Open side air vents as required and direct them towards door windows. z Switch on heated rear window Ü. For simultaneous warming of the foot well, set air distribution switch to J. Picture no: 17657j.tif Heating the foot well z Set air distribution switch to K. z Set the temperature switch in the red zone. z Switch on fan. Picture no: 17658j.tif Demisting and defrosting windows 9 Warning Disregard of the instructions could lead to misting or icing of the windows and subsequent accidents due to impaired visibility. Misted or icy windows, such as in damp weather, from wet clothes or when outside temperatures are low: z Move air distribution switch to l. z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as far as it will go (warm). z Set the fan switch to 3 or 4. 150 Climate control Air conditioning system 3 As a supplement to the heating and ventilation system, the air conditioning system cools and dehumidifies (dries) inflowing air. If cooling or dehumidification is not desired, switch off cooling in order to save fuel. Cooling switches off automatically at low outside temperatures. Picture no: 17659j.tif Picture no: 17660j.tif Cooling n Operation only with engine running: On = Press n Off = Press n again Air recirculation system 4 The recirculation switch 4 is used to set the ventilation system in recirculation mode (control indicator in switch). Control indicator in the button. If fumes or unpleasant odours penetrate from outside: temporarily switch on air recirculation system 4. Climate control 151 The switched-on air recirculation system reduces air replacement. The humidity increases and the windows may mist up. The quality of the interior air deteriorates over time, which may cause drowsiness. Picture no: 17661j.tif Comfort setting z Set cooling n as desired. z Air recirculation system 4 off. z Set air distribution switch to M or L. z Set temperature switch as desired. z Set fan switch to desired setting. z Open vents as required. Temperature switch in centre of adjustment range: warmer air will flow into the foot well and cooler air into the upper zone, with warmer air coming from the side air vents and cooler air from the centre vents. Picture no: 17662j.tif Maximum cooling Open windows and sun roof 3 briefly so that warm air can escape rapidly. z Cooling n on. z Set air distribution switch to M. z Turn the temperature switch anticlockwise as far as it will go (cold). z Set fan switch to 4. z Open all vents. The system will switch automatically to recirculation mode. 152 Climate control z Turn the temperature switch clockwise. z Open side air vents as required and direct them towards door windows. z Switch on heated rear window Ü. Operation with cooling (air conditioning compressor) is not possible when outside temperatures are low. To switch off, press button V again; the air conditioning will operate at the settings selected previously. Picture no: 17663j.tif Window demisting and de-icing 9 Warning Disregard of the instructions could lead to misting or icing of the windows and subsequent accidents due to impaired visibility. Misted or icy windows, such as in damp weather, from wet clothes or when outside temperatures are low: z Cooling n on. z Press button V: The fan will automatically switch to 4, air distribution directed on to the windscreen. Automatic air conditioning system 3 Provides a uniformly comfortable interior regardless of the weather, outside temperature or season. To ensure a constant and comfortable climate in the vehicle, the temperature of the inflowing air and the air-flow rate are changed automatically based on climate conditions outside the vehicle. Temperature changes due to external influences, such as direct sunlight, are automatically compensated. Climate control Picture no: 17912j.tif Automatic mode Basic setting for maximum comfort: z Set fan switch to A. Picture no: 17666j.tif Air distribtion setting L to head area above adjustable air vents and to foot well 153 Picture no: 17667j.tif Temperature preset Set the rotary switch to a value betwen 17 °C and 27 °C. Intermediate settings are possible. M to headroom via adjustable air vents l to the windscreen and front door windows For reasons of comfort, temperature can only be changed in small increments. J to the windscreen, front door windows to foot well z All front air vents open. If desired, the rear vents also 3. K to foot well There is no temperature control for settings below 17 °C (all the way left) or above 27 °C (all the way right). The air conditioning system works at maximum cooling or heating. Deactivation of the air conditioning compressor can reduce the level of comfort and safety – see page 154. Open the air vents when the switch is set to L or M. z Set air distribution switch to desired position – see next column. z Use rotary switch to set temperature to 22 °C (a higher or lower temperature can be set as desired). z Air conditioning compressor activation – see page 154. Intermediate settings are possible. The selected temperature is maintained. 154 Climate control When the cooling (air conditioning compressor) is active, the air is cooled and dehumidified. If cooling or dehumidification is not desired, switch off cooling in order to save fuel. Cooling switches off automatically at low outside temperatures. Picture no: 17668j.tif Air flow setting 1 - 4 Manual fan speed setting. Intermediate settings are possible. A Automatic control of fan speed x Fan off The fan speed regulates the rate of air flow that is needed to maintain the pre-selected temperature. Select automatic mode for the highest level of comfort. When the fan is off, the air conditioning compressor is also off. Picture no: 17669j.tif To activate/deactivate air conditioning compressor (cooling) n Operation only with engine running: On = Press n Off = Press n again Control indicator in pushbutton. Climate control 155 The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the passenger compartment air deteriorates which may cause the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy. In operation without cooling the air humidity increases, so the windows may mist up. Consequently, manual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time. To deactivate manual air recirculation: Press button 4 again. The control indicator in the button goes off. Picture no: 17670j.tif Picture no: 17671j.tif Manual air recirculation mode The air recirculation system prevents the entry of outside air and the air in the passenger compartment is circulated. Ventilation z For maximum ventilation in head area: set air distribution switch to M and open all vents, Press button 4, control indicator in button. z for ventilation to foot well: Set air distribution switch to K, z for simultaneous ventilation to the head area and the foot well: set air distribution switch to L, z set desired temperature, z set fan switch to A. The fan can also be manually set: Set the rotary switch to position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are also possible. 156 Climate control Heating The amount of heat is dependent on the coolant temperature and is thus not fully attained until the engine is warm. For rapid warming of the passenger compartment: z Set the air distribution switch to the desired position – see page 147. z Set the centre rotary switch to the desired temperature. We recommend a value of about 22 °C. z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be manually set: Set the rotary switch to position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are also possible. The passenger compartment is heated more rapidly by an electric auxiliary heater in vehicles with Quickheat 3. The comfort and general well-being of the vehicle occupants are to a large extent dependent on a suitable ventilation and heating setting. To obtain temperature stratification in the vehicle with a pleasant "cool head and warm feet" effect, move the rotary air distribution switch to K or J, move the rotary temperature switch to approx. 22 ° and open the centre air vents. Picture no: 17672j.tif Maximum cooling for very hot interior Open windows and sun roof 3 briefly so that warm air can escape rapidly. z Cooling n on. z Set air distribution switch to M. z Set the temperature switch to the desired temperature. z Set fan switch to A. z Open all vents. Climate control 157 The automatic climate control system provides maximum cooling down to the set value. z Set temperature to maximum heating, i.e. turn the centre rotary switch all the way to the right (28 °C). At settings below 17 °C (rotary switch all the way to the left), the system continually runs with maximum cooling. When the air conditioning compressor is running, the system is automatically set to air recirculation. Operation with cooling (air conditioning compressor) is not possible when outside temperatures are low. z Switch on heated rear window Ü. To switch off, press button V again; the automatic air conditioning system will operate at the settings selected previously. Picture no: 17673j.tif Demisting and defrosting the windows 9 Warning Disregard of the instructions could lead to misting or icing of the windows and subsequent accidents due to impaired visibility. Misted or icy windows, such as in damp weather, from wet clothes or when outside temperatures are low: z Cooling n on. z Press button V: In switch position A, the fan automatically switches to the highest speed and air is directed to the windscreen. 158 Climate control Electronic climate control system 3 Provides a the greatest amount of comfort in the interior regardless of the weather, outside temperature or season. To ensure a constant and comfortable climate in the vehicle, the temperature of the inflowing air, the air-flow rate and the air distribution are changed automatically according to climatic conditions outside the vehicle. The air is automatically regulated in accordance with the settings personally selected for the driver and passenger sides. Temperature changes due to external influences, such as direct sunlight, are automatically compensated. Data is shown on the information display. Setting modifications are briefly shown in the information display, superimposing over the currently displayed menu. The display can vary according to the type of presentation – see page 42. The settings of the climate control system are automatically stored specifically for the vehicle key used. See page 64. Picture no: 17675j.tif Different settings are stored for each remote control. Use of a remote control will activate the settings associated with it. Manual settings e. g. operating without cooling and air distribution can be selected using the menu – see page 160. When cooling (air conditioning compressor) is active, air is cooled and dehumidified. The pollen filter removes dust, soot, pollen and spores from the inflowing outside air. Picture no: 17676j.tif The automatic air recirculation system 3 has an air quality sensor 3 to detect harmful ambient gases, in which case it will switch automatically to recirculation. When set to automatic mode, the climate control system provides the optimal settings for almost all conditions. If necessary, climate control system settings can be modified manually. The climate control system is only operational when the engine is running. Cooling (air conditioning compressor) switches off automatically at low outside temperatures. Climate control The temperature can be set higher or lower as desired. Different temperatures can be set for the driver and passenger sides. Switching off the air conditioning compressor (Eco appears in the display) can have a detrimental effect on comfort and safety, see page 162. All air vents (except the rear air vents 3) are controlled automatically in automatic mode. The front air vents should therefore always be open. Picture no: 17528j.tif Automatic mode Basic setting for maximum comfort: z Press AUTO button. z All front air vents open. If desired, the rear vents also 3. z Air conditioning compressor activation – see page 162. z Individually set temperature for the driver’s and passenger side to 22 °C using the outer knobs. 159 Automatic air recirculation system 3 The ventilation system is set to recirculation mode and interior air is recirculated. The automatic air recirculation system has an air quality sensor to detect harmful gases in the outside air, in which case it will switch automatically to recirculation. At low outside temperatures and with the cooling (air conditioning compressor) switched off, automatic recirculation operation will be disabled. This prevents the windows from misting up. Switch manually to air recirculation as necessary. Activating/deactivating automatic air recirculation system – see page 163. Manual recirculation mode – see page 164. 160 Climate control Temperature preset Using the outer knobs, temperatures can be individually set to values between 16 °C and 28 °C. Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc For reasons of comfort, temperature can only be changed in small increments. The passenger compartment is heated more rapidly by an electric auxiliary heater in vehicles with Quickheat 3. If a temperature below 16 °C is set, Lo appears in the display: the climate control system runs constantly at maximum cooling power. The temperature is not regulated. If a temperature above 28 °C is set, Hi appears in the display: the climate control system runs constantly at maximum heating power. The temperature is not regulated. Temperature settings are stored when the ignition is switched off. Picture no: 17677j.tif Picture no: 17678j.tif Common temperature setting Press the knob for the driver’s side. The temperature for both the driver and passenger side together can be set using the knob on the driver’s side. Manual settings Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced or misted windows), the functions of the climate control system can be modified manually. Individual temperature settings Press the knob for the passenger side. Temperatures can be set independently of each other using the knobs for the driver and passenger sides. Climate control system settings can be changed via the centre knob, the buttons and the menus depicted on the display. The temperature on both the driver and passenger side are shown in the display. For reasons of comfort, the temperatures cannot differ by more than 2 °C. Press the centre knob to call up the menu. The menu for manual climate control system settings appears in the display. Climate control The air flow can be increased or decreased by turning the central knob. Air distribut. To return to automatic mode: press button V or AUTO. Heated rear window, see page 145. Auxiliary heating 3, see page 165. Picture no: 17679j.tif The individual menu items are marked by rotating the centre knob and selected by pressing it. Selecting certain menus by pressing the knob will open a submenu. To exit a menu, turn the centre knob left or right to Return or Main and select. Manual settings are stored when the ignition is switched off. 161 Picture no: 17680j.tif Window demisting and de-icing 9 Warning Failure to follow the instructions could lead to misted or icy windows and accidents stemming from impaired visibility. Misted or icy windows, such as in damp weather, from wet clothes or when outside temperatures are low: Press button V, control indicator in button. Temperature and air distribution settings are made automatically, the fan runs at a high speed (fan speed is indicated on the display) and the windows are quickly cleared of moisture and ice. 162 Climate control Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc Air conditioning on / off Inflowing air is neither cooled nor dehumidified. This restricts the level of comfort provided by the electronic climate control system. This may cause the windows to mist up, for example. Air distribut. To activate cooling: Select menu item AC from the manual settings menu and press to activate cooling. Picture no: 17681j.tif Activating and deactivating air conditioning compressor If no cooling or dehumidification is required, switch the air conditioning compressor off (maximum energy savings): Mark menu item AC from the manual settings menu and select by pressing. Eco appears on the display. Picture no: 17682j.tif Air distribution Select menu item Air distribut. from the manual settings menu. Make the desired settings in the Air distribut. menu: Up Air distribution to windscreen and front side windows Centre Air to vehicle occupants via front adjustable air vents Down Air distribution to foot well Return to automatic air distribution: deactivate relevant setting or press button AUTO. Climate control Automatic blower Strong Normal Weak Picture no: 17683j.tif Picture no: 17684j.tif Air flow Turn the centre rotary knob clockwise or anticlockwise (if no menu for manual settings is displayed). The selected fan level is indicated by x and numbers in the display. Fan control in automatic mode 3 Fan regulation in automatic mode can be modified. At speed 0 both the fan and cooling (air conditioning compressor) are switched off. Depending on the setting, the maximum air flow, and thereby the noise level, will increase. To return to automatic mode: Press AUTO button. Select menu item Automatic blower from the manual settings menu and select the desired fan control. Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc 163 Automatic recirculation air control at bad outside air Picture no: 17685j.tif Switching automatic recirculation 3 on or off The automatic air recirculation system has an air quality sensor to detect harmful gases in the outside air, in which case it will switch automatically to recirculation. Select menu item Auto. recirc from the manual settings menu and switch it on or off by pressing. Switch to manual air recirculation as necessary. 164 Climate control The air conditioning will operate for a limited period of time. Residual air conditioning on If necessary, the auxiliary heating 3 also automatically switches on. Observe notes on page 165. To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO button. Picture no: 17686j.tif Manual air recirculation mode The air recirculation system prevents the entry of outside air and the air in the passenger compartment is circulated. Press button 4, control indicator in button. The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the passenger compartment air deteriorates which may cause the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy. In operation without cooling the air humidity increases, so the windows may mist up. Consequently, manual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time. To deactivate manual air recirculation: Press button 4 again. The control indicator in the button goes off. Picture no: 17687j.tif Air conditioning with the engine not running When the vehicle is stopped and the ignition off, the heat or cooling power still in the system can be used to condition the passenger compartment, for example when stopped at a level crossing. Press button AUTO with the ignition off. Residual air conditioning on will appear briefly in the display. Climate control Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc Parking heater Picture no: 17688j.tif Auxiliary heating/ventilation 3 If the engine is switched off, the interior is heated or ventilated depending on the values that have been set and the interior temperature. The regulation is in accordance with the most recent temperature settings in the climate control system – see page 160. When the system is switched on, the temperature setting can be varied using the outer rotary knobs. The air is directed to the windscreen and the front side windows if the V button is pressed before switching the ignition off. 9 Warning Do not switch auxiliary heater on in filling stations or closed spaces – risk of fire or injury. 165 Parking heater Start 1 Start 2 Start 3 On Setting Picture no: 17689j.tif Direct activation For immediate activation with the ignition on, select menu item Parking heater and then menu item On from the manual settings menu. When the system is activated, the control indicator in the button AUTO will illuminate. The system switches itself off automatically after a maximum of 60 minutes depending on the values that have been set and the interior temperature. For early deactivation, press the AUTO button or select menu item Parking heater and then menu item On once again. 166 Climate control Parking heater Setting Start 1 Start 1 Start 1 Start 2 Start 2 Start 2 Start 3 Start 3 Start 3 On On Setting Setting Parking heater Picture no: 17690j.tif Switching on at a programmed time Three programmed times can be stored for switching on. For safety reasons only one programmed time for switching on can be active at any one time. After the heating cycle has been completed, the next required time for switching on must be activated afresh. To store a programmed time for activation, select menu item Parking heater from the manual settings menu. After menu item Parking heater the current status will be shown. Picture no: 17691j.tif To set a time, select menu item Setting. Then select menu item Start 1, Start 2 or Start 3 and set the desired time. Picture no: 17692j.tif Select the required time for programmed switching on. When the system is activated, the control indicator in the button AUTO will illuminate. The system switches itself off automatically after a maximum of 60 minutes depending on the values that have been set and the interior temperature. To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO button. The menu for auxiliary heating can be called up within 2 hours of switching the ignition off, by pressing on the central rotary knob, and settings entered. Climate control 167 The remote control has a range of approx. 600 m. The range can be reduced by obstructions between the sender and receiver (e.g. walls) and by low power in the battery. The system switches itself off automatically after a maximum of 60 minutes depending on the values that have been set and the interior temperature. The auxiliary heating can be switched off at any time by pressing the button §. Deactivating an activated switch-on time: Picture no: 17693j.tif Remote control The system can also be switched on and off directly using the remote control: On = Press button b, the control indicator in the remote control unit will illuminate Off = Press button §, the control indicator in the remote control unit will illuminate Whilst the control indicator is illuminated, no further signal can be sent. When the system is activated, the control indicator in the button AUTO will illuminate. 1. Press button §. 2. Delay of at least 3 seconds. 3. Press button § again. If required, up to three additional remote control units can be programmed. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17694j.tif Changing the remote control battery Replace the battery immediately if the range of the remote control starts to become reduced. Insert a pointed object into the opening in the underside of the remote control and flip open the cover. Replace batteries observing installation position. For battery type – see page 307. Always exchange all batteries at the same time. Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in accordance with environmental protection regulations. 168 Climate control Air outlet General information Do not cover the air outlets when storing items in the luggage compartment storage compartments. If the windscreen is misted due to damp weather, temporarily adjust the system as described under "Demisting and defrosting the windows", see pages 149, 152 and 161. Pollen filter The pollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen and spores from the air entering from outside. The active carbon layer 3 eliminates most odours and harmful ambient gases from the air. Picture no: 17695j.tif Air intake The air intakes in front of the windscreen on the far right and left sides of the engine compartment must be kept clear to allow air intake. Remove any leaves, dirt or snow. Have the pollen filter replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Booklet. The cooling system 3 operates most effectively with the windows and sun roof 3 closed. If the passenger compartment has heated up considerably after a long period in direct sunlight, briefly open the windows and sun roof 3 so that the hot air can escape quickly. Climate control When cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is switched on condensation forms, which is expelled from the underside of the vehicle. At least one air vent must be open while cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is on in order to prevent the evaporator from icing up due to lack of air movement. Cooling switches off automatically at low outside temperatures. When the auxiliary heating/auxiliary ventilation 3 is switched on the Vauxhall alarm system monitoring of the vehicle interior 3 is deactivated. Auxiliary heating 3 consumes fuel (approx. 0.3 litres per heating process on average). When the auxiliary heating 3 is switched on there may briefly be some smoke and noise. The auxiliary heating 3 only switches itself on at outside temperatures of less than approx. 20 °C and at coolant temperatures of less than approx. 80 °C. In order to improve heating power and ensure that the engine operating temperature is reached quickly, auxiliary heating 3 also switches on automatically when driving if the outside temperature is less than approx. 8 °C. This occurs irrespective of stored auxiliary heating switch-on times. Auxiliary heating switches itself off automatically when the engine is switched off, while the combustion air fan continues running for approx. 2 minutes (humming noise). 169 Maintenance In order to ensure consistently good operation, the air conditioning compressor 3 must be switched on for several minutes once per month irrespective of the weather or time of year. If the vehicle has an electronic climate control system, this is done automatically during travel. Operation with cooling (air conditioning compressor) is not possible when outside temperatures are low. Every 6 months, the auxiliary heating 3 should be operated for a few minutes at a preset temperature above 22 °C. If a fault occurs, consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 170 Easytronic Easytronic Easytronic 3 The semi-automatic Easytronic transmission 3 permits manual (manual mode) or automatic gear shifting (automatic mode), both with automatic clutch control. 9 Warning Transmission display ........................... Starting the engine.............................. Easytronic operation via the selector lever ..................................... Move selector lever toward N............. Starting off ........................................... Electronically controlled driving programmes ...................................... Winter programme T ......................... Kickdown .............................................. Braking assistance from engine ......... Stopping the vehicle............................ Vehicle storage .................................... "Rocking" the car ................................. Manoeuvring the vehicle..................... Fault...................................................... Interruption of power supply .............. 170 171 171 171 172 173 174 174 175 175 175 176 176 176 177 Disregard of these instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. Picture no: 17924j.tif Transmission display Shows the mode or current gear. Easytronic 171 It is not necessary to select the neutral position before starting. If no gear is engaged, the transmission automatically shifts into neutral position (N) before starting the engine. This can lead to a slight delay when starting. Picture no: 18277j.tif Starting the engine Operate foot brake when starting the engine. The engine can only be started with the foot brake operated. "N" appears in the transmission display. If the foot brake is not operated the control indicator j illuminates on the instrument panel, and "N" flashes in the transmission display - the engine cannot be started. Also the vehicle cannot be started if all brake lights have failed. Picture no: 17909j.tif Easytronic operation via the selector lever Always move the selector lever in the appropriate direction as far as it will go. Upon release, it automatically returns to the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/ mode indicator in the transmission display. Move selector lever toward N Neutral. 172 Easytronic It is also possible to start off without depressing the foot brake if the accelerator pedal is operated directly after moving the selector lever. If there is no immediate acceleration or the foot brake is not depressed, no gear is engaged and "A" flashes. After a few seconds, the display reverts to "N". Repeat previously described starting procedure. In Automatic mode, selection of other gears is automatic irrespective of driving conditions. Picture no: 17910j.tif Starting off Depress the foot brake, release the hand brake, move the selector lever to A, + or -. Easytronic is in automatic mode and first gear is engaged (second gear if the Winter programme is active). "A" appears in the transmission display. The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot brake is released. Move selector lever toward A Switch between automatic and manual mode. Manual gear shifting is possible in manual mode. The currently engaged gear appears in the display. If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic will automatically shift to a lower gear even in Manual mode. This prevents the engine from stalling. Picture no: 17909j.tif Move selector lever toward + or + Shift to a higher gear. - Shift to a lower gear. If a higher gear is selected when the running speed is too low, or a lower gear when the speed is too high, no shift is effected. This prevents the engine from running at too low or too high revs. Gears can be skipped by moving the selector lever repeatedly at short intervals. Easytronic If the vehicle is in automatic mode, on movement of the selector lever to + or Easytronic shifts to manual mode and changes up or down. The transmission display shows the currently selected gear. Move selector lever toward R Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is stationary. Depress the foot brake, release the hand brake and move the selector lever to R. Reverse gear is engaged. "R" appears in the transmission display. The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot brake is released. It is also possible to start off in reverse without depressing the foot brake if the accelerator pedal is operated directly after moving the selector lever. If there is no immediate acceleration or the foot brake is not depressed, no gear is engaged and "R" flashes. After a few seconds, the display reverts to "N". Repeat previously described starting procedure. 173 Electronically controlled driving programmes z By means of delayed gear changing (higher engine speeds) following a cold start, the operating temperature programme in automatic mode quickly and automatically brings the catalytic converter to the temperature required for optimum pollutant reduction. z Adaptive programmes automatically adapt gear shifting in automatic mode to suit the driving conditions, such as if the vehicle is towing a caravan/trailer, has a high payload, or is being driven on inclines. z Winter programme: Press button T - see next page. 174 Easytronic If the vehicle is switched to manual mode while the winter programme is active, the winter programme is interrupted. The winter programme resumes upon return to automatic mode. Picture no: 17911j.tif Picture no: 17176t.tif Winter programme T Kickdown In the event of difficulties starting off on slippery roads, press button T ("A" and T appear in the transmission display). Easytronic switches to automatic mode and the vehicle sets off in second gear. Accelerator pedal pressed past the pressure point: below certain speeds, the transmission shifts down into a lower gear. Full engine power is available for acceleration. The winter program is switched off by: z pressing button T again, z turning off the ignition. During kickdown no manual gear shifting is possible. In order to protect the Easytronic the winter programme automatically switches itself off at extremely high clutch temperatures. Easytronic When the engine speed approaches its upper limit, the transmission shifts to a higher gear during kickdown even in Manual mode. Without kickdown this automatic shift is not effected in Manual mode. Braking assistance from engine Automatic mode: When driving downhill, Easytronic does not shift into higher gears until a fairly high engine speed has been reached. When braking, Easytronic shifts down in good time. Manual mode: To utilise the engine braking effect, select a lower gear in good time when driving downhill. Stopping the vehicle Vehicle storage In Automatic or Manual mode, when the vehicle has stopped first gear (with Winter mode engaged, second gear) is engaged automatically and the clutch released. In R reverse remains engaged. Before leaving the vehicle: z engage hand brake, z remove ignition key. When the engine is running, a gear is engaged and the foot brake is not depressed, a warning buzzer sounds when the driver’s door is opened and the gear shown in the transmission display flashes at a rapid rate. If the hand brake is not engaged, the vehicle creeps. Move the selector lever to N and apply the hand brake. When stopping on gradients, engage the hand brake or depress the brake pedal. To prevent overheating of the clutch, do not increase engine speed to ensure smooth idling when in gear. In order to prevent damage to the Easytronic the clutch is automatically engaged at extremely high clutch temperatures. Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level crossings. 175 The most recently engaged gear (indicator in transmission display) remains engaged. With N, no gear is engaged. When the ignition is switched off the Easytronic no longer responds to movement of the selector lever. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery may become discharged if the vehicle is parked for long periods. If the hand brake has not been applied, the control indicator R flashes for a few seconds after the ignition is switched off. With the engine off and the hand brake not applied, when the driver’s door is opened a warning buzzer sounds and the control indicator R flashes; switch on ignition, engage gear, switch off ignition and apply hand brake. 176 Easytronic "Rocking" the car If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, move the selector lever between R and A (or + or -) in a repeat pattern while applying light pressure to the accelerator pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid sudden acceleration. This applies only to the exceptional circumstances mentioned above. Picture no: 17177t.tif Picture no: 17544j.tif Manoeuvring the vehicle Fault To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth during attempts to park or in garage entrances the creeping movement can be utilised by releasing the foot brake. Control indicator A illuminates in the event of a fault in the Easytronic system. In the event of serious faults, F also appears in the transmission display. Never actuate accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. It is possible to continue driving if only control indicator A illuminates. Manual mode can then no longer be selected. To prevent damage, Easytronic disengages the "creep function" at extremely high automatic clutch temperatures. If F appears in the transmission display, continued driving is not possible. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Easytronic If the cause of the interruption to the power supply is not the discharged battery, consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If the vehicle has to be removed from moving traffic, release clutch as follows: 6. Fit cleaned cap again. The cap must be in full contact with the housing. 1. Apply hand brake and switch off ignition. Consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 2. Open bonnet. Picture no: 17925j.tif Interruption of power supply The clutch is not disengaged if the vehicle battery is discharged and a gear has been selected. The vehicle cannot move. If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using jump leads – see page 230. 177 3. Clean Easytronic around the cap (see figure 17925 J) so that no dirt can get into the opening when the cap is removed. 4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by lifting upwards – see figure 17925 J. 5. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise using a flat-head screwdriver (vehicle tools 3 – see page 238) until clear resistance can be felt. The clutch has now been disengaged. Do not turn beyond the resistance, since this can damage the Easytronic. Towing the vehicle and starting the engine is not permitted when the clutch has been released in this way, although the vehicle can be moved a short distance. 178 Automatic transmission Automatic transmission Transmission display ........................... Selector lever settings P, R, N and D (automatic mode) ............................. ActiveSelect (manual mode) .............. Transmission display ........................... Electronically controlled driving programmes ...................................... Winter programme T ......................... Kickdown .............................................. Engine braking..................................... "Rocking" the car ................................. Manoeuvring the vehicle..................... Stopping the vehicle............................ Fault...................................................... Interruption of power supply .............. Automatic transmission 3 The automatic transmission allows automatic shifting (Automatic mode) or manual shifting (Manual mode) to take place. 179 179 180 179 181 182 182 183 183 183 184 184 185 The engine can only be started with the selector lever in P or N. When starting in N, depress the foot brake or apply the hand brake. After the engine has started, depress the brake before engaging a gear. Do not accelerate while selecting a gear. Once a gear is engaged and the brake is released, the vehicle "creeps". Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal simultaneously. The selected gear is shown in the transmission display, see page 179. 9 Warning Disregard of these instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. Selecting D puts the transmission in automatic mode. If the selector lever is moved to the left from the D position, manual mode is activated. Gearchanges can then be made manually by tipping the selector lever toward + or -. Automatic transmission 179 The selector lever can only be moved out of position P or N with the ignition switched on and the foot brake applied (selector lever lock). In selector lever position N the selector lever lock is activated after a delay and only if the vehicle is stationary. Picture no: 17536j.tif Transmission display Display of selector lever setting, gear and mode. P Park position. R Reverse gear. N Neutral or idling position. D Automatic mode. 1-6 Manual mode, engaged gear. Picture no: 17696j.tif Selector lever settings P, R, N and D (automatic mode) P Park position, front wheels blocked. Only select with vehicle stationary and hand brake applied. "P" appears in the transmission display. R Reverse gear. Only select when vehicle is stationary. "R" appears in the transmission display. N Neutral or idling position. "N" appears in the transmission display. D Drive position for normal driving in 1st to highest gear. "D" appears in the transmission display. 180 Automatic transmission If the engine speed is too slow, the transmission automatically shifts to a lower gear, but not if the gear was selected below a certain speed. If a higher gear is selected below a certain speed a downshift does not take place. When engine speed is high, there is no automatic shift to a higher gear. For reasons of safety, Kickdown also functions in manual mode – see page 182. Picture no: 17697j.tif In position P or N, control indicator j illuminates red in the selector lever indicator strip, and the selector lever is blocked. Picture no: 17698j.tif ActiveSelect (manual mode) Shift the selector lever from D first to the left and then forward or rearward. To engage P or R, push button on selector lever. + - The engine can only be started with lever in position P or N. When position N is selected, press foot brake or engage hand brake before starting. If a higher gear is selected at too low a speed or a lower gear selected at too high a speed, there is no change. This avoids revs that are too low or too high. Do not accelerate during the selection procedure. If the transmission fluid temperature is less than -25 °C, the selector lever cannot be moved until the fluid temperature reaches -25 °C with the engine running (P or N flashes in the transmission display for as long as the selector lever is locked). Shift to a higher gear Shift to a lower gear The selected gear is shown in the transmission display – see page 179. Automatic transmission Electronically controlled driving programmes z With adaptive programmes, shifting into other gears is handled automatically based on the driving style, e.g.: – Economical driving style: at slower engine speeds. – Adaptation to special driving conditions still takes place, such as: driving up and down hills, towing a caravan or trailer, and with a heavy load. 181 z Automatic neutral shift function automatically sets the transmission to N to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at traffic lights. The automatic neutral shift function is activated when the following occurs simultaneously: – The selector lever is in Automatic or Manual mode. – The foot brake is depressed. – The vehicle is stationary. – The accelerator pedal is not actuated. – The transmission oil temperature is above 0 °C. As soon as the brake is released and the accelerator pedal is depressed, the vehicle starts off in the usual manner. z After a cold start, the operating temperature programme ensures that the correct gear (increased engine speed) is selected to quickly bring the catalytic converter to the temperature required for optimum pollutant reduction. Picture no: 17705j.tif z When SPORT mode of Continuous Damping Control 3 is activated, shift times are reduced and gearchanges occur at a higher engine speed (unless cruise control is active). Control indicator 1 appears in the transmission display. Continuous Damping Control, SPORT mode 3 – see page 200. z Winter programme: Press button T. Control indicator T appears in the transmission display - see next page. 182 Automatic transmission To deactivate The winter program is switched off by: z pressing button T again, z switching off the ignition, z switching to Manual mode. To protect against damage, the startingoff aid automatically cuts out at very high transmission oil temperatures. Picture no: 17699j.tif Picture no: 17176t.tif Winter programme T Kickdown Press button T if you are having problems starting off on a slippery road surface. Depress accelerator past resistance point: transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on engine speed. Full engine power is available for acceleration. To activate The winter programme can be activated in automatic mode (T illuminates in transmission display). The vehicle starts off in 4th gear. For safety reasons, kickdown is available in both automatic mode and manual mode. Automatic transmission Engine braking "Rocking" the car The automatic transmission automatically selects the driving programme with optimal engine braking effect. If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, move the selector lever from D to R in a repeat pattern while simultaneously applying light pressure to the accelerator pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid sudden acceleration. As needed, lower gears can also be selected in manual mode to increase engine braking effect. 1st gear has the greatest braking effect. 183 This applies only to the exceptional circumstances mentioned above. Picture no: 17177t.tif Manoeuvring the vehicle To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth during attempts to park or in garage entrances, the vehicle’s creeping movement can be utilised by releasing the brake pedal. Never actuate accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. 184 Automatic transmission Stopping the vehicle The selector lever can be left in the chosen gear with the engine running. When stopping on gradients engage hand brake or depress brake pedal. To prevent overheating of the transmission, do not increase engine revolutions to ensure smooth idling while standing if a gear has been selected. Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level crossings. Before leaving the vehicle, apply hand brake, then place selector lever in position P and remove ignition key. The ignition key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P. If the selector lever is not in the P position when the ignition is switched off, control indicator j in the selector lever indicator strip flashes – see page 180, Fig. 17697 J. Shift the selector lever to P. If the ignition key is not removed, the battery may be discharged if the vehicle is then left to stand for a lengthy period of time. Fault Picture no: 17544j.tif In the event of a fault in the automatic transmission, control indicator A illuminates. The transmission no longer shifts automatically. Driving can be continued. In manual mode, 2nd gear and the highest gear can be engaged. For some faults, only the highest gear is available. Only the highest gear is available in D in automatic mode. Automatic transmission 185 Illumination of control indicator A can also indicate a fault in the engine electronics – see page 195. For diesel engines1) Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTH illumination of control indicator A could also indicate that the diesel fuel filter must be drained of water – see page 270. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Picture no: 17700j.tif Interruption of power supply If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector lever cannot be moved out of position P or N. If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using jump leads – see page 230. If the cause is not a discharged battery, unlock selector lever: 1. Apply hand brake. 2. Remove the ashtray – see page 102. 3. Pull out ashtray socket upwards. 1) Sales designation – see page 284. Picture no: 17701j.tif 4. Push the yellow catch downwards with a screwdriver and move the selector lever out of P. 5. Refit ashtray socket in centre console and latch into position. 6. Refit ashtray. Re-selecting P or N locks the selector lever again. Have cause of power supply interruption remedied. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 186 Driving hints Driving hints The first 600 miles / 1000 km Drive your vehicle at various speeds. Do not use full throttle. Never allow the engine to labour at low revs. Make good use of all gears. Depress the accelerator pedal a maximum of around three quarters of the available pedal travel in all gears. Do not drive faster than three quarters of maximum speed. Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the first 120 miles (200 km). Never coast with engine not running Many units will not function in this situation (e.g. brake servo unit, electro-hydraulic power steering). Driving in this manner is a danger to yourself and others. Brake servo unit When the engine is not running, the brake servo unit is no longer effective once the brake pedal has been depressed once or twice. Braking effect is not reduced, but significantly greater force is required for braking. Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering If the power-assisted steering fails when being towed with the engine switched off, the vehicle can still be steered, but considerably more force is required. Driving in mountainous terrain or with a trailer/caravan The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling power is therefore independent of the engine speed. Since a considerable amount of heat is generated at high engine speeds and less at slower speeds, do not shift down when climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping with the gradient in the higher gear. Diesel engine: On rising gradients of 10% or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50 km/h) in 2nd gear; with automatic transmission 3, do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in position 1. Driving with a roof load Do not exceed the permissible roof load – see pages 220, 293. For reasons of safety, distribute the load evenly and secure it properly with retaining straps. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). Check and retighten the straps frequently. Observe country-specific regulations. Switching off the engine When you switch off, fans in the engine compartment may continue running for a time to cool the engine. Driving hints If the engine temperature is very high, e.g. after driving in mountainous terrain: allow the engine to idle for approximately two minutes in order to prevent heat accumulation. Vehicles with turbocharged engine After running at high engine speeds or high engine loads, operate the engine briefly at a low load or run in neutral for approx. 30 seconds before switching off in order to protect the turbocharger. Save energy – more miles Please observe the running-in hints on the previous page and the tips for energy saving on the following pages. Good, technically correct and economical driving ensures maximum durability and performance for your vehicle. Overrun The fuel supply is automatically shut off during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is being driven down long gradients or when braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to take effect, do not accelerate during overrun and, if in manual transmission mode, do not de-clutch. To prevent damage to the catalytic converter, overrun cut-off is temporarily deactivated when the catalytic converter temperature is high. 187 Vehicles with turbocharged engine Flow-generated noises may be audible if the accelerator is released quickly on account of air flow in the turbocharger. Clutch operation Engine speed When driving do not use the pedal as a foot rest; this will cause substantial clutch wear. Drive in a low engine speed range for each gear as much as possible. Warming up Allow the engine to warm up while driving. Do not warm it up by letting it run at idling speed. Do not apply full throttle until the engine has reached operating temperature. After a cold start, the automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in automatic mode shifts into higher gears at higher rpm. This allows the catalytic converter to quickly reach the temperature required for optimum pollutant reduction. Correct gear selection Engine in neutral and without revving in the lower gears. Stop-and-go traffic and driving at a speed too high for the selected gear or transmission ratio increases wear and fuel consumption. Change down When decreasing speed, shift down into the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch with a high-revving engine. This is especially important when hill climbing. Always depress the clutch pedal hard to the floor to prevent shifting difficulties and transmission damage. Cooling fan The cooling fan is controlled via a thermoswitch and therefore only runs if necessary. The cooling fan automatically switches on when the diesel particle filter is being cleaned 3 depending on the engine. Pedals Do not place any objects in the foot well which could slip under the pedals and inhibit the pedal travel. To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited, there must be no mats in the area of the pedals. Battery care When driving slowly or when the vehicle is stationary, e.g. in slow urban traffic, stopand-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all unnecessary electrical loads where possible (e.g. heated rear window, heated seats). Declutch when starting in order to relieve the strain on the starter and the battery. 188 Saving fuel, Protecting the environment Saving fuel, Protecting the environment New painting techniques employ water as a solvent. End-of-life vehicle recovery For detailed information on Vauxhall’s ongoing commitment to achieving an environmentally sustainable future, including; design for recycling, take back of End-of-Life Vehicles (ELVs) and the recycling of ELVs view www.vauxhall.co.uk/recycling for details. Energy and environmentconscious driving Trend-setting technology When developing and manufacturing your vehicle, Vauxhall used environmentfriendly and in the main recyclable materials. The production methods used to make your vehicle are likewise environmentally-compatible. Recycling of production wastes keeps the circulation of material closed. Reduction of energy and water requirements also helps to conserve natural resources. A highly advanced design means that your vehicle can be easily disassembled at the end of its working life, and the individual materials separated for subsequent re-use. Materials such as asbestos and cadmium are not used. The refrigerant in the air conditioning system 3 is CFC-free. z High noise levels and exhaust emissions are often a result of driving without due attention to saving energy and protecting the environment. z You should therefore drive with energy in mind "more miles – less fuel". Reduce the noise level and exhaust emissions by adopting an environmentconscious driving style. This is extremely worthwhile and improves the quality of life. Fuel consumption depends to a great extent on your own personal driving style. The following hints are intended to help you consume fuel at a rate that is as close as possible to the specified levels – see page 287. Check your vehicle’s fuel consumption every time you refuel. This facilitates early detection of any irregularities causing increased fuel consumption. Warming up z Full throttle and warming up at idle speed increase wear, fuel consumption, exhaust emission, the amount of pollutant in the exhaust and the amount of noise. z Drive off as soon as possible after starting. Uniform speed z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel consumption, the exhaust emissions, the proportion of pollutant in the exhaust gas and the noise level. z Do not accelerate and brake unnecessarily. Drive at uniform speed, watching the road. Avoid frequent starting off and stopping e.g. at traffic lights, in short distance traffic and in queues of traffic by means of clever planning. Select roads with good traffic flow. Idling z The engine also consumes fuel when idling. z If you have to wait for more than one minute, it is worthwhile switching off the engine. Five minutes of idling corresponds to approximately 0.6 mile (1 km)of driving. Saving fuel, Protecting the environment Overrun z The fuel supply is automatically shut off during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is being driven down long gradients or when braking – see page 187. z To enable the overrun cut-off to come into action and save fuel, do not accelerate or declutch during overrun. Correct gear selection z High revs increase engine wear and fuel consumption. z Do not race your engine. Avoid driving at high engine speeds. Making use of the tachometer helps to save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed range for each gear as much as possible with uniform engine speeds. Drive as often as possible in top gear, select the next higher gear as soon as possible, and only change down when the engine is no longer running perfectly smoothly. High speed z The higher the speed, the higher the consumption and the noise level. At top speed, you consume a great deal of fuel and produce excessive noise and exhaust emissions. z Slightly releasing the accelerator pedal results in distinct fuel savings with no major loss of speed. Drive at no more than around three quarters of maximum speed and you will use up to 50% less fuel, without losing a great deal of time. Tyre pressure z Inadequate tyre pressure, leading to higher road resistance, costs money in two ways: for more fuel and increased tyre wear. z Regular checks (every 14 days) pay off. Electrical loads z The power consumption of electrical equipment increases fuel consumption. z Switch off all auxiliary electrical loads (e.g. air conditioning 3, heated rear window) when not needed. Roof racks, ski-holders z Due to air resistance, a roof load can increase fuel consumption by approx. 3.5 gal/h (1 l/100 km). z Remove them if they are not being used. 189 Repair and maintenance z Improper repairs or adjustment and maintenance work can increase fuel consumption. Do not carry out work on the engine yourself. You may out of ignorance infringe environmental laws by not disposing of materials properly. Appropriate parts might not be recycled. Contact with some of the materials involved may pose a health hazard. z We recommend that repair and maintenance be entrusted to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Extreme driving conditions z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving on poor roads and winter driving all increase fuel consumption. Fuel consumption increases dramatically in urban traffic and at winter temperatures, especially on short trips when the engine operating temperature is not reached. z Follow the hints given above to keep consumption to a minimum under such conditions. 190 Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling Fuel consumption Fuel consumption is determined under specific driving conditions – see page 287. Special equipment increases the weight of the vehicle. As a result, they can increase fuel consumption and reduce the specified maximum speed. For the first few thousand miles, friction between the engine and transmission components is higher. This increases fuel consumption. Fuel for petrol engines Fuel consumption ................................ Fuel for petrol engines ........................ Fuel for diesel engines......................... Fuel filler cap........................................ Refuelling.............................................. 190 190 191 191 191 Normal commercial high-quality fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 5% in accordance with DIN EN 228 are suitable (for catalytic converter see page 193, for octane numbers see pages 284, 285). The quality thereof has considerable effect on the performance, running and service life of the engine. The additives mixed with the fuel are extremely important. For this reason you must only refuel with highquality fuels containing additives. The use of 91 octane fuel is not permitted in vehicles with the Z 22 YH1) engine or the Vectra VXR. Pump nozzles for leaded fuel cannot be inserted into the filler neck of vehicles that operate on unleaded fuel. The ignition timing adjusts automatically to the grade of fuel used (octane number) – see pages 284, 285. Use of petrol with an octane rating of 95 will ensure economical driving. Fuel with 95 RON will result in less power and torque with the Vectra VXR. Fuels with ethanol content greater than 5% do not comply with DIN EN 228 and must not be used unless the vehicle has been specifically developed and approved for these fuels. Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pinking. Vauxhall cannot be held liable for resulting damage. Petrol with a higher octane number can always be used. 1) Sales designation – see page 284. Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling Fuel for diesel engines Diesel engines must be operated only on commercially available diesel fuel meeting the specifications of DIN EN 590. Since January 2004, some oil companies have mixed their diesel fuel with upto 5% Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters) like RME (Rape-Oil Methyl Ester). This is in accordance with the current DIN EN 590 and does not harm the fuel/injection system. The characteristics of a diesel fuel mixed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not differ from conventional diesel fuel and do not influence the vehicle’s driveability. Important: Diesel fuel mixed with 5% FAME according to DIN EN 590 must not be confused with 100% Bio Diesel, which is not to be used in Vauxhall engines. The flow and filterability of diesel fuel are temperature-dependent. Diesel fuels with improved low temperature properties are therefore available on the market during the winter months. Make sure that you fill the tank with winter fuel before the start of the cold weather season. Additives can be used with diesel fuels with winter properties that are guaranteed by the manufacturer and when using diesel fuel filters that are heated depending on the outside temperature. Diesel fuels must not be diluted with fuels that are intended for petrol engines. 191 Fuel filler cap If replacing the fuel filler cap, be sure to use a genuine Vauxhall fuel filler cap for your model to ensure full functionality. Dieselengined vehicles have special fuel filler caps. Picture no: 17197t.tif Refuelling 9 Warning Care must be taken when handling fuel. Before refuelling, turn off engine and also shut off external heaters with combustion chambers (identified by stickers on fuel filler cap). Switch off mobile phones. The tank display updates more quickly if the ignition is switched off during refuelling. 192 Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling Correct filling depends to a large extent on proper operation of the fuel dispensing pump: 9 Warning Fuel is flammable and explosive. Avoid naked flames and sparks when handling fuel, and even in the vicinity of fuel. Do not smoke! This also applies if the presence of fuel is only noticeable due to the smell of fuel. If you smell fuel inside the vehicle, have the cause checked out immediately. We recommend that you use your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 1. Fully insert the pump nozzle and switch it on. 2. After an automatic shut-off the nominal capacity of the fuel tank is reached by means of two metered top-ups. Insert fuel dispensing pump as far as it will go. To close, position the fuel filler cap and rotate past the resistance until the cap audibly clicks over the retainer. Picture no: 17198t.tif Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle. The tank flap is locked together with the doors – see page 66. Open the tank flap. To open, unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove and suspend from the tank flap. The fuel tank has a limiting system which prevents overfilling of the tank. Close fuel tank cover. Wipe off any overflowing fuel immediately. Catalytic converter, exhaust gases Catalytic converter, exhaust gases Damage to the catalytic converter or the vehicle may result if the following points are not observed: z Consult a workshop, such as your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, as quickly as possible in the event of misfiring, irregular engine running following a cold start, a significant loss of engine power or other unusual malfunctions which may indicate a fault in the ignition system. If necessary, driving may be continued for a short time at a low speed and with a low engine speed. Picture no: 17199t.tif Catalytic converter for petrol engines Catalytic converter for petrol engines Catalytic converter for diesel engines Controlling exhaust emission.............. Exhaust gases ...................................... Maintenance ........................................ 193 193 194 195 196 197 Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic converter and parts of the electronic system, rendering them inoperative. Use of high-quality fuels other than those specified on page 190 (e.g. LRP1)) could damage the catalytic converter. On vehicles with a catalytic converter, the fuel tank filler neck is of a narrow design so that a dispensing pump for leaded fuel cannot be inserted. 1) LRP = Lead Replacement Petrol. Irregular engine running and a loss of engine power when the Electronic Stability Program (ESP®Plus 3) comes into action are the result of operating conditions and are therefore of no significance - see page 198. 6 194 Catalytic converter, exhaust gases z If unburned fuel enters the catalytic converter, this may result in overheating and irreparable damage to the catalytic converter. You should therefore avoid unnecessarily long use of the starter when starting off, running the tank dry (an irregular fuel supply will lead to overheating) and starting the engine by pushing or towing. z If the emission control indicator Z flashes, slow down until the flashing stops and the control indicator is steady. Consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. For emission control indicator Z – see page 195. Catalytic converter for diesel engines Damage to the catalytic converter or the vehicle may result if the following points are not observed: z Consult a workshop, such as your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, as quickly as possible in the event of irregular engine running, a significant loss of engine power or other unusual malfunctions. If necessary, driving may be continued for a short time at a low speed and with a low engine speed. Irregular engine running and a loss of engine power when the Electronic Stability Program (ESP®Plus 3) comes into action are the result of operating conditions and are therefore of no significance - see page 198. Catalytic converter, exhaust gases 195 Flashing with the engine running indicates a fault that may damage the catalytic converter. You can continue to drive without causing damage by slowing down until the flashing stops and the control indicator is steady. Consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17532j.tif Controlling exhaust emission Through design-related measures – mainly in the area of the fuel-injection and ignition systems – the proportion of noxious materials in the exhaust, such as carbon monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC) and nitrogen oxides (NOx), is reduced to a minimum. Picture no: 17702j.tif Control indicator Z for exhaust Illuminates when the ignition is switched on and during the start attempt. Goes off shortly after the engine starts running. If it illuminates while the engine running there is a fault in the emission control system. The permitted emission values may be exceeded. Consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 196 Catalytic converter, exhaust gases In some cases, the fault can be remedied by switching the engine off and on again. If the control indicator illuminates again when the engine is running, consult a workshop to have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If it illuminates briefly, but does not recur, it is of no significance. Picture no: 17544j.tif Control indicator A for engine electronics Illuminates for a few seconds after the ignition is switched on. If it illuminates when the engine is running, there is a fault in engine or transmission electronics. The electronic system switches to an emergency running programme. Fuel consumption may be increased and the driveability of the vehicle may be impaired. Illumination of A can also be an indication of water in the diesel fuel filter in engines1) Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT and Z 19 DTH. Have the fuel filter checked for water residue. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If it flashes after the ignition is switched on, there is a fault in the immobiliser system. The engine cannot be started. See page 63. 1) Sales designation – see page 284 Exhaust gases 9 Warning Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous carbon monoxide, which is colourless and odourless and could be fatal if inhaled. If exhaust fumes penetrate the vehicle interior, open the windows and consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. During the first drive smoke may develop because of wax and oil evaporating on the exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the open for a while after the first drive and avoid inhaling the fumes. Catalytic converter, exhaust gases Diesel particle filter 3 The diesel particle system filter polluting soot particles out of the exhaust. The system contains a self-cleaning function at certain intervals. The filter is cleaned by burning the soot particles at high temperature, This procedure runs automatically under certain vehicle conditions and can take up to 25 minutes, during which time fuel consumption may increase. The smell and the noise that occur are normal. The system cannot automatically clean itself under certain vehicle conditions such as driving short distances. If the control indicator ! flashes, you should continue driving and as soon as the road and traffic situation permits it, increase speed to more than 25 mph (40 km/h) and diesel particle filter cleaning will start. Cleaning is quicker at faster speeds and under load. The engine speed should not drop below 2000 rpm. The control indicator goes off as soon as cleaning is complete. We recommend that you do not turn the ignition off during cleaning. Maintenance Have all maintenance work carried out at the intervals specified by Vauxhall. We recommend that you entrust this work to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who has proper equipment and trained personnel available. Electronic testing systems permit rapid diagnosis and remedy of faults. This way you can be certain that all components of the vehicle’s electrical, injection and ignition systems operate correctly, that your vehicle has a low level of pollutant emission and that the catalytic converter system will have a long service life. 197 You are thereby making an important contribution towards keeping the air clean and compliance with emissions legislation. Checking and adjustment of the fuel injection and ignition systems is part of the scope of inspection. For this reason you should have all maintenance work carried out at the intervals specified in your Service Booklet. 198 Drive Control Systems Drive Control Systems Interactive Driving System (IDS+ = Interactive Driving System) 3 The IDS+ combines the sensors and control units of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP®Plus), the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) and Continuous Damping Control (CDC). This provides both excellent driving dynamics and greater safety. Electronic Stability Program (ESP®Plus ) 3 Interactive Driving System .................. Electronic Stability Program ............... Cruise control 3 ................................... Parking distance sensor 3 .................. Automatic level control 3 ................... Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 ... 198 198 202 204 206 206 ESP®Plus improves driving stability when necessary in any driving situation regardless of the type of road surface or tyre grip. It also prevents the drive wheels from spinning. The system monitors vehicle movements. As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve (understeers/oversteers) engine output is reduced (the sound of the engine changes) and individual wheels are specifically braked. This considerably improves the driving stability of the vehicle on snow and ice and on wet or slippery road surfaces. ESP®Plus is ready for operation as soon as the ignition is switched on and control indicator v goes out. Control indicator v flashes when ESP®Plus is in action. The vehicle is now in a critical situation; ESP®Plus allows you to keep control of the vehicle and reminds you to match your speed to the road conditions. 9 Warning Do not let this special safety feature tempt you into taking risks when driving. Traffic safety can only be achieved by adopting a responsible driving style. Drive Control Systems 199 Illuminates while driving The system is switched off or a fault has occurred. The vehicle can continue to be driven. However, driving stability may worsen depending on the nature of the road surface. Reactivate ESP®Plus or have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated selfdiagnostics allow faults to be quickly remedied. Picture no: 17703j.tif Control indicator v Illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. The system is now ready for operation. Flashing during driving This shows the system has come into action. The engine output may be reduced (the sound of the engine changes) and the vehicle may be braked automatically to a small degree. Picture no: 17704j.tif Switching off 3 ESP®Plus can be deactivated by pressing button v 3. Deactivation is only possible up to a speed of 40 mph (60 km/h) and is indicated by illumination of control indicator v on the instrument panel. Pressing the v button again or turning on the ignition switches ESP®Plus on again. 200 Drive Control Systems Continuous Damping Control 3 (CDC) Normal mode CDC automatically adapts vehicle damping to the current driving situation and road conditions. The system continually monitors wheel and vehicle movements and immediately modifies the damping of each shock absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally adapted to the driving situation and road conditions. Continuous Damping Control is always in normal mode with the ignition is switched on. If desired, the system can be switched to SPORT mode. In SPORT mode, the damping control is adapted to a sportier driving style, among other things. This adaptation results in a "harder" suspension setting. SPORT mode - see next column. SPORT mode In SPORT mode the damping, the steering and the acceleration are modified while driving, as are the shifting points if the vehicle has automatic transmission 3. Damping and steering become more direct and provide better contact with the road surface. The engine reacts more quickly to accelerator movements. With automatic transmission 3 the shift times are reduced and gear changes occur at higher engine speeds (not when cruise control 3 is active). Picture no: 17705j.tif Activating SPORT mode Press the SPORT button. The LED in the button illuminates. In vehicles with automatic transmission 3 the control indicator 1 also illuminates in the transmission display. If the winter programme has been switched on 3 (vehicles with automatic transmission 3) SPORT mode cannot be activated. Winter programme – see page 182. Drive Control Systems Deactivating SPORT mode Briefly press the SPORT button again. The LED in the button goes out. The Continuous Damping Control system resumes Normal mode. 201 The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. SPORT mode is switched off by switching on the ignition or switching off the winter programme 3 (vehicles with automatic transmission 3). Winter programme – see page 182. Picture no: 17706j.tif Control indicator u for Continuous Damping Control or SPORT mode fault Illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. If the control indicator does not go out or illuminates while driving, there is a fault in the Continuous Damping Control or SPORT mode system. The system is not operational. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 202 Drive Control Systems Cruise control 3 Cruise control can store and maintain speeds of approx. 20 to 125 mph (30 to 200 km/h). Deviation from the saved speed is possible on uphill or downhill inclines. For safety reasons, cruise control cannot be activated until the foot brake has been activated. Cruise control is operated with buttons m, g, and § on the turn signal stalk. Do not use the cruise control if it is not advisable to maintain a constant speed (e.g. in situations presenting a danger to yourself and other road users, in heavy traffic or on winding, slippery or greasy roads). With automatic transmission 3, only use cruise control in D or in automatic mode with Easytronic 3. When the cruise control is active, reaction times may be increased due to the different position of the feet. 9 Warning Even with cruise control activated, the driver has full responsibility for maintaining an appropriate speed. Disregard of these instructions could lead to injury or danger to life. Picture no: 17707j.tif Control indicator m Illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. The system is now ready for operation. When driving, control indicator m will illuminates as soon as the system is switched on. Drive Control Systems Decelerate With cruise control active, hold down button g or briefly press it repeatedly: speed is reduced continuously or in steps of 1.2 mph (2 km/h). When button g is released the current speed is stored and maintained. 203 To deactivate Briefly press button §: Cruise control is switched off, control indicator m goes out and the vehicle slowly decelerates. To continue driving, depress the accelerator pedal in the usual manner. For reasons of safety, cruise control deactivates under certain driving conditions. For example: z the vehicle’s speed drops below approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) or Picture no: 16990t.tif To activate Briefly press button m: the current speed is stored and maintained. The accelerator pedal can be released. Vehicle speed can be increased by depressing the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released, the previously stored speed is resumed. Increase With cruise control active, hold down button m or briefly press it repeatedly: speed is increased continuously or in steps of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the accelerator pedal. When button m is released the current speed is stored and maintained. z the brake pedal is depressed or z the clutch pedal is depressed or z selector lever of automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in N. Resuming the stored speed Briefly press button g at a speed above 20 mph (30 km/h): the speed selected before the cruise control was switched off is resumed. The stored speed value is deleted when the ignition is switched on. 204 Drive Control Systems Picture no: 17708j.tif Parking distance sensor 3 The parking distance sensor makes reverse parking easier by measuring the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle, and giving an acoustic signal in the passenger compartment. Picture no: 17709j.tif The system registers distance by means of four sensors in each of the front and rear bumpers. Picture no: 17710j.tif To activate With the ignition switched on, the front and rear parking distance sensor systems are automatically activated when reverse gear is engaged. The parking distance sensor can also be activated at speeds of less than 15 mph (25 km/h) by pressing the r button on the instrument panel. An illuminated LED and an acoustic signal indicate that it is ready for operation. Drive Control Systems Caravan/trailer towing equipment 3, Caravan/trailer towing The system automatically detects if a towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle. If the vehicle approaches an obstacle to the front or rear, an series of signals is sounded in the vehicle interior. The interval between the signals becomes shorter as the distance is reduced. If the distance is less than 30 cm, the signal will be continuous. When towing, inserting the trailer plug in the socket automatically switches off the parking distance sensor. 9 Warning Under certain circumstances, various reflective surfaces on objects or clothing as well as external noise sources may cause the system to fail to detect obstacles. For this reason, care must be taken when reversing even if the parking distance sensor is operational. This is of particular importance when in the vicinity of pedestrians. To deactivate To deactivate the system, press button r again, the LED in the button will go dark. The system switches itself off automatically when the forwards speed exceeds approx. 15 mph (25 km/h). 205 Fitting rear load racks 3 Rear load racks, e.g. bicycle racks, fitted near the sensors could disrupt the system. Picture no: 17711j.tif Control indicator r Illuminated Fault in the system. The system is not ready for operation. Have the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. If it flashes The fault is due to sensors obstructed with snow or ice. The sensors must be undamaged and free of dirt, snow and ice. Interference due to external sources of ultra sound (e.g. pneumatic drills, rotary machines). Once the source of interference is removed, the system will operate normally. 206 Drive Control Systems The vehicle is automatically raised at the rear, increasing the spring travel and ground clearance. The automatic level control system is activated after approx. 2 miles (3 km), depending on the vehicle loading and the nature of the road surface. Headlight range adjustment – see page 129. Picture no: 17712j.tif Automatic level control 3 Automatic level control makes it possible to keep the height of the vehicle constant when subjected to different loads in the rear (e.g. when towing a caravan or trailer). This significantly improves driving conditions. In the event of malfunctions, do not utilise the vehicle’s full load capacity. Have the cause remedied without delay. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 The tyre pressure monitoring system continuously monitors the pressure of all four tyres while the vehicle is being driven. A pressure sensor is integrated in each wheel. Once each minute, the pressure of each tyre is sent to a control unit for comparision. if the system detects one or more pressure differences, control indicator w illuminates or flashes red. In vehicles with check control 3, the exact pressure of the tyre in question appears in the information display. In vehicles with graphical information display 3 or colour information display 3 and trip computer 3, current tyre pressures can be shown in the information display. For the system to be operational, all wheels must be equipped with pressure sensors and all tyres must be inflated to the prescribed pressure. The tyre pressure monitoring system automatically detects if the vehicle is being driven with a load of up to 3 persons or a full load. Drive Control Systems Once the ignition is switched on, the system is operational and will continuously monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) and above. 9 Warning The tyre pressure monitoring system does not replace manual checks with a suitable gauge. Check tyre pressures at least every 14 days and prior to any long journey; the tyres should be checked when cold. Don’t forget to check the spare 3. Tyre pressure – see pages 215, 299. 207 Ü Board Computer BC 1 BC 2 Timer Tyres Picture no: 17334t.tif Display of current tyre pressure 3 Select menu item Tyres from the Board Computer menu. The current pressure of each tyre is displayed. Picture no: 17713j.tif Control indicator w in red as warning message Illumination in red while driving indicates deviating tyre pressure. Indicator illuminates red Minor tyre pressure difference; slow down. Check tyre pressure at next opportunity with a suitable gauge and correct if necessary. Indicator flashes red Considerable pressure difference or direct loss of pressure! Stop immediately and check tyre and tyre pressure. Fit spare wheel if necessary, see pages 236, 238. 208 Drive Control Systems Warning messages in the graphical information display 3 or colour information display 3 In the version with check control 3 differing tyre pressures while driving are indicated by messages on the information display. The message appears in abbreviated form depending on the version. For example, the following messages can be displayed: Navi active Navi active Tyre pressure Attention! check rear left tyre (value in bar) Front left tyre pressure loss (value in bar) OK Picture no: 17353t.tif A graphic 3 indicating the left rear tyre is shown together with the current tyre pressure: Slight pressure deviation. Reduce speed. Check pressure at next opportunity with appropriate gauge and correct if necessary. On the colour information display this report will appear in yellow. OK Picture no: 17354t.tif A diagram 3 appears at the same time, marking the front left tyre and showing the current tyre pressure: Considerable pressure difference or direct loss of pressure! Exit flow of traffic as soon as possible without obstructing other vehicles, stop and check tyre and tyre pressure. Fit spare wheel if necessary, see pages 236, 238. On the colour information display this report will appear in red. Acknowledgement of warnings – see page 50. Drive Control Systems General information The spare tyre or temporary spare wheel is not equipped with a pressure sensor. If the spare tyre or temporary spare wheel is used the tyre pressure monitoring system will not work for this wheel, and the control indicator w will illuminate yellow. The system remains operational for the other three wheels. Picture no: 17713j.tif Control indicator w in yellow as fault message If control indicator w illuminates yellow while driving, there is a fault in the tyre pressure monitoring system. Fitting a wheel without pressure sensor (e.g. spare wheel) will also generate a fault in the system. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. If a complete set of wheels that do not have tyre pressure monitoring system sensors is used, (e.g. four winter tyres or retrofitting of a different size tyre) no warning message is displayed. The system is not operational. Sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system can be retrofitted. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 209 When manually checking tyre pressure with a pressure gauge, screw the adapter onto the valve. Tyre pressure – see page 215. The tyre pressure monitoring system valve cores and sealing rings must be replaced each time the tyres are changed. We recommend that you contact your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The use of commercially available liquid filled run-flat systems or repair kits can impair the function of the system. Vauxhall-approved systems can be used. Radio transmitters (e.g. radio headphones, walkie-talkies) operated in the area could cause interference in the tyre pressure monitoring system. 210 Brakes Brakes Brake system The brakes are an important factor for traffic safety. To improve effectiveness, do not brake unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles (200 km) after new brake pads have been fitted. Brake pad wear must not exceed a specified limit. Regular maintenance as detailed in the Service Booklet is therefore of the utmost importance for traffic safety. Brake system........................................ 210 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)........ 212 Have worn brake pads replaced. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will fit pads that have been tested and approved by Vauxhall and guarantee optimum braking power. Picture no: 17206t.tif Brake assist If the brake pedal is slammed on, the vehicle is automatically braked with maximum brake force amplification in order to achieve the shortest possible braking distance when full-on braking occurs (braking assist). Maintain steady pressure on the brake pedal for as long as full-on braking is to continue. When the brake pedal is released, the maximum brake force amplification is taken away. Adaptive brake light During full-on braking, all three brake lights flash for the duration of ABS control. Brakes Foot brake The foot brake comprises two independent brake circuits. If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle can still be braked using the other brake circuit. If this occurs, however, the brake pedal must be depressed quite far using considerable force before braking effect occurs. The distance required for braking will be greater. Consult a workshop before continuing your journey. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. To ensure that full pedal travel – can be utilised, particularly if there is a fault in one of the brake circuits, there must be no mats in the pedal area, see page 187. When the engine is not running, the support of the brake servo unit disappears once the brake pedal has been depressed once or twice. Braking effect is not reduced, but braking requires significantly greater force. This is especially important to bear in mind when towing. 211 Check the brake lights before starting out on a journey. On vehicles with check control 3 the brake lights are checked automatically – see page 58. Shortly after starting each journey the effectiveness of the brake system should be tested at low speed and without inconveniencing other traffic, especially if the brakes are wet, e.g. after the vehicle has been washed. The brake fluid level should be checked regularly. If the brake fluid level is too low and the hand brake is not applied, control indicator R on the instrument panel illuminates – see page 35. Picture no: 17714j.tif Hand brake Always apply handbrake firmly, and as firmly as possible on uphill or downhill slopes. Fold up armrest 3 to do this. The mechanical hand brake acts on the brakes on the rear wheels. It engages automatically when applied. To release the hand brake pull the lever up slightly, press the ratchet knob, and fully lower the lever. To reduce the operating forces of the hand brake, depress the foot brake at the same time. 212 Brakes Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u) ABS continually monitors the brake system and prevents the wheels from locking regardless of the type of road surface or tyre grip. Picture no: 17715j.tif Brake system control indicator R The control indicator illuminates when the ignition is switched on if the hand brake is applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is too low. Brake fluid – see page 272. 9 Warning If the control indicator illuminates when the hand brake is not applied: Stop. Interrupt your journey immediately. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. It starts to regulate the braking pressure as soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock. The vehicle remains steerable, even in the event of very heavy braking, for instance on bends or when swerving to avoid an obstacle. Even in the case of full-on braking, the ABS makes it possible to drive round an obstacle without releasing the brakes. ABS control is made apparent though a pulse in the brake pedal and the noise of the regulation process. 9 Warning For optimum braking, keep the brake pedal fully depressed throughout the braking process, despite the fact that the pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce the pressure on the pedal. Do not let this special safety feature tempt you into taking risks when driving. Traffic safety can only be achieved by adopting a responsible driving style. Brakes 9 Warning If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may be subject to locking due to braking that is heavier than normal. The advantages of ABS are no longer operational. The vehicle can no longer be steered and may swerve. You can continue driving, provided you drive with care and anticipation. Picture no: 17716j.tif Control indicator u for ABS The control indicator illuminates for several seconds when the ignition is switched on and the system undergoes a self-check at the same time (may be audible). The system is ready for operation when the control indicator goes out. If the control indicator does not go out after a few seconds, or if it illuminates while driving, there is a fault in the ABS. The brake system remains operational without ABS regulation. 213 Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. 214 Wheels, tyres Wheels, tyres Tyres See page 297 for suitable tyres and restrictions. Tyres fitted in the factory are adapted to the chassis and provide optimum driving comfort and safety. Changing tyre/wheel type Before switching to different tyres or wheels, seek advice on the technical possibilities. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will be able to advise you of any necessary modifications. Tyres ..................................................... Changing tyre/wheel type................... Tyre pressure........................................ Tyre condition, wheel condition ......... Winter tyres 3 ...................................... Wheel trims 3....................................... Tyre chains 3 ....................................... 214 214 215 217 219 219 219 If tyres of a different size than those fitted at the factory are used, the electronic speedometer may require reprogramming to ensure that the correct speed is displayed. 9 Warning Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may lead to accidents and render the vehicle unroadworthy. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system 3 If winter tyres or tyres of a different size are fitted, tyre pressure monitoring system sensors can be retrofitted if so desired. Otherwise, the system will not indicate tyre pressure deviations. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see page 206. Wheels, tyres Fitting new tyres Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is even better. Ensure that tyres on one axle are z the same size, z the same design, z the same make, z and have the same tread pattern. Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the direction of travel. The rolling direction is indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on the sidewall. Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction (e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be refitted as soon as possible. This is the only way to obtain full benefit from the design properties of the tyre. 9 Warning We recommend that you have your tyres changed by your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will be familiar with the requirements of the law as regards disposal of tyres and can thus help to protect the environment and your health. 215 Some brands of tyres have a beaded edge for alloy wheels to protect against damage. If wheel trim is used on steel wheels with beaded-edge tyres, the following procedure must be followed: z Use wheel trims and tyres that are approved by Vauxhall for the vehicle in question and therefore meet all the requirements pertaining to the respective wheel/tyre combination. z If the wheel trims and tyres used are not Vauxhall-approved, the tyres must not have a beaded edge. 9 Warning Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims could lead to sudden loss of air and thereby accidents. Picture no: 17211t.tif Tyre pressure Check tyre pressures, including the spare wheel, at least every 14 days and prior to any long journey; the tyres should be checked when cold. Don’t forget to check the spare. Use the valve cap key to make unscrewing the valve caps easier. The key is located on the inside of the tank flap. 6 216 Wheels, tyres Hidden tyre damage is not eliminated by adjusting the inflation pressure. 9 Warning Incorrect tyre pressure could lead to a flat tyre. Picture no: 17212t.tif In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system 3 there is an adapter in the valve cap key. Screw adapter to valve before attaching tyre pressure gauge, see page 206. Tyre pressure – see page 299 and the adhesive foil on the inside of the tank flap. Have adhesive foil replaced after changing to different tyre size. Do not reduce tyre pressure when the tyres are warm. Otherwise the pressure may drop below the permissible minimum when the tyres cool down. Picture no: 17213t.tif After having checked the tyre pressures, tighten the valve caps using the valve cap key. Incorrect inflation pressures will impair safety, vehicle handling, comfort and fuel economy and will increase tyre wear. If the pressure is too low, this can result in considerable tyre warm-up and internal damage, leading to tread separation and even to tyre blow-out at high speeds. Wheels, tyres 217 Check tyres regularly for damage (foreign bodies, punctures, cuts, cracks, bulges in sidewalls). Check wheels for damage. In the event of damage or abnormal wear, consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 9 Warning Damage may lead to tyre blow-out. Picture no: 17214t.tif Tyre condition, wheel condition Drive over edges slowly and at a right angle if possible. Driving over sharp edges can lead to hidden tyre damage and wheel damage which is only noticed later on. When parking, ensure that the tyres are not pressed against the edge of the kerb. Picture no: 17215t.tif Tread depth Check tread depth regularly. If wear in the front is greater than that in the rear, move the rear wheels to the front axle and vice versa. Correct tyre pressure. For reasons of safety, tyres should be replaced when their tread depth has worn down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm). 218 Wheels, tyres General information z The danger of aquaplaning is greater if the tyres are worn. z Tyres age, even if they are used only very little or not at all. A spare wheel which has not been used for six years should be used only in emergencies; drive slowly when using such tyres. z Never fit used tyres the previous history and use of which you do not know. Picture no: 17216t.tif The legally permissible minimum tread depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when the tread has worn down as far as one of the wear indicators (TWI1)). A number of wear indicators are spaced at equal intervals around the tyre within the tread. Their position is indicated by markings on the tyre sidewall. 1) TWI = Tread Wear Indicator. z So as not to impair brake cooling, use only wheel trims approved for use on your vehicle. Tyre designations Meanings: e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H 195 = Tyre width in mm 65 = Aspect ratio (tyre height to tyre width) in % R = Belt type: Radial 15 = Rim diameter in inches 91 = Load index e.g.: 91 represents 618 kg H = Speed code Speed code letters: Q S T H V W Up to 100 mph (160 km/h) Up to 112 mph (180 km/h) Up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Up to 130 mph (210 km/h) Up to 150 mph (240 km/h) Up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Wheels, tyres Winter tyres 3 Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into contact with parts of the chain and be damaged. Remove the wheel trim – see page 239. For notes on fitting new tyres – see page 215. See page 299 for restrictions. Tyre chains may only be used at speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h)1). When driving on roads that are free of snow, they may only be used for brief periods since they are subject to rapid wear on hard roads and could snap. Winter tyres improve safety at temperatures below 7 °C and should therefore be fitted on all the wheels. The design of summer tyres means they have limited qualities for winter driving. If the maximum permissible speed for the winter tyres is less than that of the vehicle, a notice indicating the maximum permissible speed for the tyres must be affixed within the driver’s field of vision1). If you use the spare wheel when it is fitted with a summer tyre, the vehicle’s driveability may be affected, especially on slippery road surfaces. Obtain a replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have the wheel balanced and fitted to the vehicle. Wheel trims 3 If the wheel trims and tyres used are not Vauxhall-approved, make sure that the tyres do not have a beaded edge, see page 215. 1) Varies from country to country on account of national regulations. 219 Limitations and further information – see page 299. Temporary wheel 3 Tyre chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel. If you need to use tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre, fit the temporary spare on the rear axle and transfer one of the rear wheels to the front axle. Tyre chains are only permitted on the drive wheels (front axle). For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237. Always use fine mesh chains that add no more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the inboard sides (including chain lock). Wheel changing – see page 238. Picture no: 17217t.tif Tyre chains 3 We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Correct tyre pressure. Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see page 206. 220 Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing Picture no: 17218t.tif Roof racks 3......................................... Towing equipment 3........................... Towing equipment with removable coupling ball bar 3, Saloon / hatch3 ............................................... Towing equipment with pivoting coupling ball bar 3 ........................... Caravan and trailer loads................... Coupling socket load........................... Rear axle load during towing ............. Tyre pressure........................................ Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA) ............ Driving characteristics, towing tips .... Starting on inclines .............................. 220 221 221 224 225 226 226 226 226 227 228 9 Warning Disregard of these notes can lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly. Roof racks 3 For reasons of safety and to avoid damaging the roof, we recommend that you use the Vauxhall roof rack system approved for your vehicle. Consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Fasten the roof rack following the instructions that accompany the system. Driving hints – see page 186. Picture no: 17219t.tif Version without roof railing Fold the covers of the installation openings up - see Fig. 17218 T. Attach roof rack at appropriate points, see enclosed roof luggage rack system instructions. Version with roof railing 3 Attach roof rack to roof railing at points shown in figure, see enclosed roof luggage rack system instructions. Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing 221 Towing equipment 3 Use only towing equipment that has been approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting the retrofitting of towing equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will advise you on any possible towed load increases. Your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer has instructions on how to install the towing equipment and make any necessary changes to the vehicle that affect the cooling system, the heat shields or other equipment. 9 Warning The coupling ball bar is to be removed when not towing. For installation dimensions of the trailer towing equipment – see pages 311, 311. Picture no: 17729j.tif Towing equipment with removable coupling ball bar 3, Saloon / hatch3 Stowage of coupling ball bar The coupling ball bar is stored in a bag strapped to the spare wheel. Picture no: 17717j.tif Fitting the coupling ball bar Compress the sealing plugs at the ends and pull out of the opening for the coupling ball bar. Stow the sealing plugs in the luggage compartment. Disengage socket and fold down 3. 6 222 Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing Picture no: 17718j.tif Checking the tensioning of the coupling ball bar z Red marking on turn knob points towards green marking on coupling ball bar. z Gap of approx. 6 millimetres between rotary knob and coupling ball bar. z Key is in lock. Picture no: 17719j.tif Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be tensioned before it is inserted into the coupling housing: z Open coupling ball bar. z Pull turn knob out and then turn it clockwise as far as it will go – see figure. Picture no: 17720j.tif Inserting the coupling ball bar Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar into the coupling housing and push firmly upwards until the coupling ball bar engages in position. The turn knob snaps back into its home position resting against the coupling ball bar. 9 Warning Do not touch the turn knob when inserting the coupling ball bar – risk of injury. Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing 223 Important Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly installed: z Red marking on turn knob points towards white marking on coupling ball bar. z No gap between turn knob and coupling ball bar. z Coupling ball bar must be seated firmly in coupling housing. Picture no: 17721j.tif Open coupling ball bar. Remove key and put on provided protective clip. When the coupling ball bar is locked the turn knob can no longer be pulled out. z Coupling ball bar must be locked and key must be removed. 9 Warning Towing a caravan/trailer is only permitted with a properly attached coupling ball bar. If the coupling ball bar cannot be properly attached, consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Eye for break-away stopping cable In the case of caravans/trailers with brake, attach the break-away stopping cable to the eye. Eye - see Fig. 17721 J. Picture no: 17722j.tif Dismounting the coupling ball bar Close coupling ball bar. Pull the turn knob out and then turn it clockwise as far as it will go. Pull the coupling ball bar downwards out of the coupling housing and stow it in the luggage compartment – see page 221, Fig. 17729 J. Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the coupling ball bar. Fold away the socket – see page 221, Fig. 17717 J. Do not use steam-jet cleaners or other high-pressure cleaners to clean the coupling ball bar. 224 Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing Picture no: 17724j.tif Towing equipment with pivoting coupling ball bar 3 Folding out the coupling ball bar The release lever is in the stowage compartment to the left in the luggage compartment. To open the stowage compartment, push both latches down and open the cover. Picture no: 17725j.tif Push the release lever down; the LED on the lever remains illuminated as long as the coupling ball bar is not engaged. A warning buzzer also sounds and the coupling ball bar pivots down. 9 Warning Make sure that no one is in the pivot zone of the coupling ball bar. Risk of bodily injury. Swivel the coupling ball bar rearwards until it engages (see figure 17726 J). The LED must go out and the warning buzzer must cease. Otherwise, repeat the procedure. Picture no: 17726j.tif Important Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly engaged: z LED is not illuminated z No warning buzzer 9 Warning Towing is only permissible if the coupling ball bar is fitted properly. If the coupling ball bar does not engage correctly, the LED does not go out or the warning buzzer does not stop sounding, consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing 225 Caravan and trailer loads1) Trailer with break-away cable 3 For trailers with brake, loop break-away cable around coupling ball bar. The permissible caravan/trailer loads are vehicle- and engine-dependent maximum values which must not be exceeded. The actual caravan/trailer load is the difference between the actual gross weight of the caravan/trailer and the actual coupling socket load with the caravan/trailer attached. When the caravan/trailer load is being checked, therefore, only the caravan/trailer wheels – and not the jockey wheel – must be standing on the weighing apparatus. Picture no: 17727j.tif Stowing the coupling ball bar Open the stowage compartment – see page 224. The permissible caravan/trailer loads for your vehicle are given in the vehicle documents. Unless otherwise stated, they are valid for gradients up to max. 12%. Push the release lever down; the LED on the lever remains illuminated as long as the coupling ball bar is not engaged. A warning buzzer also sounds and the coupling ball bar pivots down. Pivot the coupling ball bar to the right and up. The LED must go out and the warning buzzer must cease, otherwise repeat the procedure. 1) Observe national regulations. 226 Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing The permissible caravan/trailer load should be fully utilised only by drivers who are adequately experienced in towing large or heavy caravans/trailers. The permitted caravan/trailer load applies up to the specified incline and up to an altitude of 1000 metres above sea level. Since engine power decreases as altitude increases because of the air becoming thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability, the permitted towing weight also decreases by 10% for every 1000 metres of additional altitude. The towing weight does not have to be reduced when driving on roads with slight inclines (less than 8%, e.g. motorways). The actual caravan/trailer load plus the actual gross weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed the maximum permitted towing weight. For example, if the permitted gross vehicle weight is utilised, the trailer/caravan load must only be used until the maximum permitted towing weight is reached. The maximum permitted towing weight is shown on the identification plate, see page 282. Coupling socket load The coupling socket load is the load exerted by the trailer/caravan on the coupling ball. It can be varied by changing the weight distribution when loading the trailer/caravan. The maximum permissible coupling socket load (Saloon / hatch: 78 kg, Estate: 85 kg) is specified on the towing equipment identification plate and in the vehicle documents. Always aim for the maximum load, especially in the case of heavy caravans/trailers. The coupling socket load should never fall below 25 kg. When measuring the coupling socket load, make sure that the drawbar of the loaded trailer/caravan is at the same height as it will be when the trailer/caravan is coupled with the towing vehicle loaded. Particularly important for trailers/caravans with tandem axle. Rear axle load during towing With the caravan/trailer coupled and the towing vehicle fully loaded (including all occupants), the permissible rear axle load (see identification plate or vehicle documents) may be exceeded by 40 kg. If the permissible rear axle load is exceeded, a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) applies. If national regulations specify a slower maximum speed for vehicles towing a caravan/trailer, this must be observed. Picture no: 17213t.tif Tyre pressure Adjust the tyre pressure on the towing vehicle to the value specified for a full load, see page 299. Also check the pressure of the caravan/trailer wheels and the spare wheel. Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA) TSA monitors vehicle movements when towing a caravan or trailer. If the system detects lurching movements, engine power is reduced and the vehicle/trailer combination is selectively braked until the lurching ceases. Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing Driving characteristics, towing tips For trailers with brake, attach break-away cable to eye 3 or loop around coupling ball bar if no eye available. Before attaching the trailer/caravan, lubricate the ball of the trailer/caravan towing device. However, do not lubricate the ball if a stabiliser, which acts on the coupling ball, is being used to damp hunting. Check caravan/trailer lighting before starting to drive. The fog tail lights on the vehicle are deactivated when towing a caravan or trailer. Caravan/trailers with LED turn signals must have a provision that makes it possible to monitor standard light bulbs. Turn signal control indicator – see page 34. The parking distance sensor system at the rear 3 is deactivated when towing a caravan/trailer. 227 Handling is greatly influenced by the loading of the trailer/caravan. Loads should therefore be secured so that they cannot slip and be placed in the centre of the trailer/caravan if possible, i.e. above the axle. Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) if possible, even in countries where higher speeds are permitted. In the case of trailers with low driving stability or caravans with a permitted gross vehicle weight of 1400 kg (Saloon / hatch) / 1500 kg (estate), do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h); the use of a friction-type stabiliser is highly recommended. If the trailer/caravan starts to sway, drive more slowly, do not attempt to correct the steering and brake sharply if necessary. Make sure that you have enough room when cornering and avoid sudden manoeuvres. If it is necessary to apply the brakes fully, depress the brake pedal as hard as possible. Remember that the braking distance for vehicles towing caravans/trailers with and without brake is always greater than that for vehicles not towing a caravan/trailer. When driving downhill, the brakes are under considerably more load when towing a caravan/trailer. For this reason, drive in the same gear as if driving uphill and drive at a similar speed. Automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in automatic mode will automatically select the driving programme with the optimum engine braking effect. 228 Roof Racks, Caravan and Trailer Towing For vehicles with automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in automatic mode it is sufficient to apply full throttle. If necessary, the gears can also be selected manually. The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling power is therefore independent of the engine speed. Before starting off under extreme conditions (high combination weight, mountainous terrain with steep inclines), switch off all unnecessary electrical loads (e.g. heated rear window, air conditioning system 3, heated seats 3). Since a considerable amount of heat is generated at high engine speeds and less at slower speeds, do not shift down when climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping with the gradient in the higher gear. Diesel engine: On rising gradients of 10% or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50 km/h) in 2nd gear; with automatic transmission 3, do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in position 1. Picture no: 17730j.tif Starting on inclines For vehicles with manual transmission, the most favourable engine speed when starting off on an incline is between 2500 and 3000 rpm for petrol engines and between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel engines. Hold engine speed constant, engage clutch gradually (let slip), release hand brake and open throttle. If possible, the engine speed should not drop during this procedure. Self-help Self-help Starting the engine with jump leads 3 Towing the vehicle............................... Towing service ..................................... Towing another vehicle....................... Warning triangle ¨3, First-aid kit + 3................................. Spare wheel 3...................................... Jack £ 3 and vehicle tools 3 ............ Changing wheels ................................. Tyre repair kit 3 ................................... Electrical system .................................. Fuses and the most important circuits they protect ....................................... Bulb replacement ................................ Halogen headlight system dipped and main beam................................. Xenon headlight system, dipped and main beam................................. Adaptive Forward Lighting System 3 Halogen headlight system, Xenon headlight system, Parking lights...... Tail lights .............................................. Number plate light .............................. Courtesy light ....................................... 9 Warning 230 232 233 233 234 236 238 238 242 246 248 252 253 255 257 257 258 261 262 Disregard of these notes can lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers should be informed accordingly. Diesel fuel system, bleeding Never let the tank run dry! If control indicator Y illuminates, refuel as soon as possible. Refuel immediately if it flashes. It is possible to restart the engine if the tank has been run dry. A delayed start is to be expected. Switch on the ignition three times for approx. 15 seconds. Then attempt to start the engine for no more than 40 seconds. If the engine does not start, wait at least 5 seconds and try again. If the engine does not start, consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 229 Starting Do not start with quick charger This prevents damage to electronic components. Do not start by pushing or towing Because your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, it must not be started by pushing or towing – see page 193. The vehicle can only be started using jump leads – see following page. 230 Self-help Starting the engine with jump leads 3 A vehicle with a discharged battery can be started using jump leads and the battery of another vehicle. 9 Warning Be extremely careful when starting with jump leads. Any deviation from the following instructions can lead to injuries or damage caused by battery explosion or damage to the electrical systems of both vehicles. z Never expose the battery to naked flames or sparks. z A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures of around 0 °C. Always thaw out a frozen batteries in a warm room before attaching jump leads. z Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. The fluid contains sulphuric acid which can cause injuries and damage in the event of direct contact. Picture no: 17229t.tif Picture no: 17731j.tif z Wear eye protection and protective clothing when handling a battery. z Switch off all unnecessary electrical consumers. z Use auxiliary battery with same voltage (12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) must not be considerably less than that of the discharged battery. Voltage and capacity information can be found on the batteries. z Do not lean over the battery during jump starting. z Use jump leads with insulated terminals and a cross section of at least 16 mm2 (25 mm2 for diesel engines). z Do not disconnect the discharged battery from the vehicle. z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to touch those of the other lead. z Do not touch the vehicles while jump starting. z Apply hand brake. Manual transmission or Easytronic 3 in neutral, automatic transmission 3 in P. The battery is in a box at the front of the engine compartment, on the right-hand side as viewed from the front. To open the box, pull the cover forwards and swing it upwards. Self-help z Do not connect leads to negative terminal of discharged battery! z Start the engine of the vehicle providing the jump start. z The connection point should be as far away from the discharged battery as possible. z After 5 minutes, start the other engine. Start attempts should be made at intervals of 1 minute not last longer than 15 seconds. z Route the leads so that they cannot catch on rotating parts in the engine compartment. Picture no: 17732j.tif Connect the leads in the order shown in the illustration: 1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to the positive terminal 1 of the battery providing the jump start (identified by "+" sign on battery case or terminal). 2. Connect the other end of this lead to the positive terminal 2 of the discharged battery ("+" sign). 3. Connect the first end of the other jump lead to the negative terminal 3 of the battery providing the start ("–" sign). 4. Connect the other end of the second jump lead 4 to ground on the other vehicle, e.g. engine block or screw connection in the engine suspension. 231 z After starting, allow both engines to idle for approx. 3 minutes with the leads connected. z In order to avoid excess voltage in the electrical system, before removing a lead, switch on an electrical consumer (e.g. light, heated rear window) in the vehicle receiving the jump start. z Reverse above sequence exactly when removing leads. 232 Self-help Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive tractive force can damage the vehicle. 9 Warning Significantly greater force is required for braking: the brake servo unit is only operational when the engine is running. Considerably greater steering force is necessary since this unit is operative only when the engine is running. Picture no: 17733j.tif Towing the vehicle To open the cover concealing the towing eye at the front right of the vehicle: disengage the cover at the bottom and pull it off downwards. The towing eye is located in the compartment containing the jack and vehicle tools underneath the spare wheel in the luggage compartment. Vehicle jack and tools – see page 238. Picture no: 17734j.tif Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far as it will go until it stops in a horizontal position. Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a tow rod 3 – to the eye. The towing eye must only be used for towing and not recovering a vehicle. Switch on ignition to release steering column lock and to permit operation of brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper. Manual transmission or Easytronic 3 in neutral, automatic transmission 3 in N. To prevent the entry of exhaust fumes from the towing vehicle, switch on the air recirculation 3 and close the windows. Vehicles with automatic transmission 3 should be towed facing forward only and must not be towed faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) or further than 60 miles (100 km). If the transmission is defective, or if the above speed or distance is to be exceeded, the front axle must be raised off the ground. Self-help 233 Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will serve you best to get your vehicle back on the road. If the automatic clutch has been manually released in vehicles with Easytronic 3 because of an interruption to the power supply, towing is not permitted – see page 176. In this case, consult a workshop as soon as possible. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. After towing, unscrew towing eye by rotating clockwise and insert and close the cap. Towing service Entrust your vehicle only to the towing service of your choice and obtain an estimate on towing costs before employing any towing service. In this way you avoid unnecessary costs and possible insurance problems during claim processing. Picture no: 17735j.tif Towing another vehicle To open the cover concealing the towing eye socket at the rear right of the vehicle: disengage the cover at the bottom and pull it off downwards. The towing eye is located in the compartment containing the jack and vehicle tools underneath the spare wheel in the luggage compartment. Vehicle jack and tools – see page 238. Picture no: 17736j.tif Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far as it will go until it stops in a horizontal position. Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a tow rod 3 – to the eye. Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive tractive force can damage the vehicle. After towing, unscrew towing eye by rotating clockwise and insert and close the cap. 234 Self-help Picture no: 17610j.tif Picture no: 17737j.tif Warning triangle ¨3, First-aid kit + 3 To access press down bar and open the cover. Saloon / hatch The warning triangle and first-aid kit/ cushion are stowed in the side panel trim on the left-hand side. Depending on the warning triangle version, move locking lever upward and therefore clamp warning triangle in position. Picture no: 17738j.tif When loading vehicle, always ensure that first-aid cushion or first-aid kit is accessible. Self-help 235 When loading vehicle, always ensure that warning triangle and first-aid cushion or first-aid kit are accessible. Picture no: 17724j.tif Estate The warning triangle and first-aid kit/ cushion are stowed in the side panel trim on the left-hand side. Picture no: 17739j.tif To open, push both bars down and open the flap. 236 Self-help Picture no: 17740j.tif Spare wheel 3 Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre repair kit instead of a spare wheel. See page 242. Saloon / hatch The spare wheel is located in the luggage compartment under the floor cover. It is secured with a plastic wing nut. To open the floor cover, pull up the handle or strap. Picture no: 17741j.tif Estate The spare wheel is located in the luggage compartment under the load floor. It is secured with a plastic wing nut. Picture no: 17742j.tif To open the loading floor, fold out release lever by pushing at the marked point and raise up the loading floor all the way. Stowing standard size tyres in the spare wheel well The spare wheel well is not designed for all sizes of commercially available tyres. If a larger wheel must be stowed in the spare wheel well after changing wheels, place the floor cover on the overlaying wheel. Self-help 237 General information Depending on the version, the spare wheel is in the form of an temporary spare wheel 3. Please pay attention to instructions concerning temporary spare wheel in the next column and on pages 219, 242, 299. Notes on temporary spare wheel 3 z Using a temporary spare wheel may change the driving behaviour of the vehicle, particularly if using winter tyres 3. Replace defective tyre as quickly as possible, balance wheel and fit to vehicle. Notes on directional tyres 3 Directional tyres only achieve their full performance potential when mounted in the prescribed direction of rotation. If after a flat tyre the tyre or spare wheel is mounted against the prescribed direction of rotation, observe the following: On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare wheel may have a steel rim. z Fit only one temporary spare wheel. z Driving conditions may be altered. Replace the defective tyre as soon as possible, balance the wheel and mount it on the vehicle. If you use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel may still be fitted with a summer tyre. If you use the spare wheel the vehicle’s handling may be altered. Obtain a replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have the wheel balanced and fitted to the vehicle. The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre and a smaller rim than the wheels mounted on the vehicle1): Using the spare wheel may alter vehicle handling. Have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible, balance the wheel and have it mounted on the vehicle. z Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). z Take curves slowly. z Do not use the temporary spare wheel for a lengthy period. z Replace temporary spare wheel with full specification wheel without delay. z Tyre chains are not permitted on the temporary spare wheel. If tyre chains have to be used after a front wheel puncture, fit temporary spare wheel to the rear axle and fit a rear wheel to the front axle. Check tyre pressure and correct if necessary, see page 299. z Please follow instructions concerning temporary spare wheel on pages 219 and 299. 1) Country-specific version: The spare wheel is only to be used as a temporary spare wheel. z Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). z Drive especially carefully in wet or snowy weather. For further information on directional tyres – see page 215. 238 Self-help Changing wheels There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a spare wheel – see page 242. To ensure your safety, make the following preparations and observe the following information when changing wheels: z Park the vehicle on a level, firm and nonskid surface. Picture no: 17241t.tif Jack £ 3 and vehicle tools 3 The jack and the vehicle tools have been specially developed for your vehicle and must only be used on that vehicle. Only use jack for changing wheels. Vehicles with spare wheel 3: The jack and vehicle tools are stowed in a compartment in the luggage compartment beneath the spare wheel. Remove the spare wheel - see page 236. Vehicles with tyre repair kit 3: The vehicle tools are stowed together with the tyre repair kit in a compartment beneath the floor cover in the luggage compartment. Picture no: 17242t.tif After use, stow away the jack and tools in the compartment as shown in illustration. z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply hand brake, automatic transmission 3 - selector lever in P, manual transmission or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse gear. z Correctly set up the warning triangle. Warning triangle – see page 234. Self-help z Take the spare wheel from the luggage compartment. z Before raising the vehicle, set the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. z Slacken the wheel bolts one half turn before raising the vehicle, but do not totally unscrew the bolts. z Never change more than one wheel at once. z Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed by placing wedge blocks or equivalent in front and behind the wheel. z Use the jack only to change wheels. 239 z If the ground on which the vehicle is standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm thick) should be placed under the jack. Using a thicker board could damage the jack and the vehicle. z Apply a light coating of grease to the cone of each wheel bolt before screwing in the wheel bolts after a wheel change. Some normal commercial grease will be required for this purpose. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z No people or animals may be in the vehicle when it is jacked up. z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehicle. z Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack. z Fully tighten the wheel bolts after lowering the vehicle all the way. Picture no: 17743j.tif 1. Prise off the wheel trim using the hook included with the vehicle tools 3. For vehicle tools, see page 238. If the wheel trim has visible wheel bolts 3, the trim can remain on the wheel. The retaining washers 3 on the wheel bolts must not be removed. 240 Self-help Picture no: 17244t.tif Alloy wheels 3: Disengage the wheel bolt caps with a screwdriver and remove. Protect the wheel by inserting a soft cloth between the screwdriver and ally wheel. Picture no: 17245t.tif 2. Slacken wheel bolts using wheel bolt wrench 3, putting on the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. Picture no: 17744j.tif 3. There are plastic retainers at the front and rear of the vehicle underbody for positioning the jack. The location of each retainer is indicated by a mark on the bottom edge of the vehicle. Self-help Picture no: 17745j.tif 4. Before attaching jack 3 set to required height by turning the eye by hand. Fit the jack 3 at the front – or rear – in such a way that the jack head engages in the plastic retainer beneath the vehicle. Check that it is properly engaged. The jack base must be on the ground directly below the jacking point in a manner that prevents it from slipping. Picture no: 17746j.tif Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and turn crank to raise vehicle. If this is not the case, carefully lower the vehicle immediately and reposition the jack. 5. Unscrew wheel bolts and wipe clean with a cloth. Then apply a light coating of grease to the wheel bolts. Do not grease the thread of the bolts. Do not put the wheel bolts down in a location where they may become soiled. If the wheel bolts have retaining washers 3, they must not be removed. 241 Picture no: 17249t.tif 6. Change the wheel. Notes on spare wheel – see page 236, notes on temporary spare wheel – see page 237. 7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly, inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Tighten wheel bolts crosswise, putting on wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. 6 242 Self-help 10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clean the wheel around the retaining clips. Valve symbol 3 on back of wheel trim must point towards valve on wheel. Align and refit wheel trim or wheel bolt caps 3. Alloy wheels 3: Align and refit wheel bolt caps 3. 11. Stow away replaced wheel, tools and warning triangle in the luggage compartment, see page 238. 12. Check the tyre pressure of the newly mounted wheel. Correct if necessary. 13. Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts on the new wheel checked on the vehicle using a torque wrench as soon as possible and, if necessary, corrected. Tightening torque – see page 299. 14. Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel that was removed. 15. Replace temporary spare wheel 3 with a full specification wheel without delay. Tyre repair kit 3 Minor damage to the tyre tread or side wall, e.g. from foreign bodies, can be repaired using the tyre repair kit. Do not remove the foreign body from the tyre. Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or that is on the rim cannot be repaired with the tyre repair kit. 9 Warning Driving with inadequate tyre pressure or a flat tyre can lead to hidden tyre damage, which cannot be eliminated by using the tyre repair kit. Part the vehicle and consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Important information – see page 246. In the event of a flat tyre: z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply hand brake, automatic transmission 3 selector lever in P, manual transmission or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse gear. z Correctly set up the warning triangle. Warning triangle – see page 234. Self-help Picture no: 17250t.tif The tyre repair kit is in a compartment in the spare wheel well of the luggage compartment. 1. Take the pouch with the tyre repair kit from the compartment. Carefully remove the components from the pouch. 2. Remove the compressor. Picture no: 17251t.tif 3. Remove the electrical connection cable and air hose from the stowage compartments on the underside of the compressor. 243 Picture no: 17252t.tif 4. Screw the compressor air hose to the connection on the sealant bottle. 5. Fit the sealant bottle in the retainer on the compressor. Set the compressor near the tyre in such a way that the sealant bottle is upright. 6. Remove the valve cap from the defective tyre. 244 Self-help Picture no: 17253t.tif Picture no: 17254t.tif 7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valve. 10. Switch on ignition. 8. The switch on the compressor must be set to §. 11. Set the rocker switch on the compressor to I. The tyre is filled with sealant. 9. Connect the compressor plug to the accessory socket or cigarette lighter socket. Accessory socket – see page 101. 12. While the sealant bottle drains (approx. 30 seconds) the pressure indicator on the compressor briefly points to 6 bar. Pressure then sinks again. 13. All of the sealant is pumped into the tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is filled with air. 14. The prescribed tyre pressure – see page 299 should be reached within 10 minutes. Switch off the compressor when the correct pressure is obtained. Picture no: 17255t.tif If the prescribed tyre pressure is not reached within 10 minutes, detach the tyre repair kit. Move the vehicle one tyre revolution (approx. 2 metres) in or against the flow of traffic. Reconnect the tyre repair kit and continue the filling procedure for 10 minutes. If the prescribed tyre pressure is still not reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Park the vehicle and consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Self-help Drain excess tyre pressure with the button over the pressure indicator. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes, see "Important information" on page 246. 15. Detach the tyre repair kit. Screw the filler hose to the free connection on the sealant bottle. This prevents sealant leakage. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage compartment. 16. Wipe away any sealant spill with a cloth. 17. Dismantle the warning triangle and stow it in the luggage compartment – see page 234. 245 18. The enclosed sticker shows the maximum permitted speed at which the tyre repair may be used. Apply sticker in the driver’s field of vision. 19. Continue driving immediately to allow the sealant to distribute evenly throughout the tyre. Stop after approx. 6 miles / 10 km (no more than 10 minutes) and check tyre pressure. Screw the compressor air hose directly onto the tyre valve (see Fig. 17256 T). Picture no: 17256t.tif If tyre pressure is more than 1.3 bar, adjust to the prescribed value. Repeat the procedure until there is no more pressure loss. If tyre pressure is below 1.3, the vehicle must not be driven. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 20. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage compartment – see page 242. 246 Self-help Important 9 Warning Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not use the temporary spare wheel for a lengthy period. Steerability and driving behaviour may be impaired. Replace repaired tyres as soon as possible. The driving comfort of the repaired tyre is severely affected, therefore have this tyre replaced. If the compressor makes abnormal noises or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least 30 minutes. The integrated safety valve opens at a pressure of 7 bar. Protect the compressor from moisture and rain. The sealant can only be stored for approx. 4 years. After this time, the sealing properties can no longer be guaranteed. Heed the expiration date on the sealant bottle. The sealant bottle can only be used once. Replace a used sealant bottle. The compressor and sealant can be used from approx. -30 °C. Dispose of a used tyre repair kit in accordance with applicable legislation. An adapter for filling air mattresses, inner tubes, etc. is located on the underside of the compressor. Remove by unscrewing the compressor air hose and pulling out the adapter. Electrical system 9 Warning Electronic ignition systems generate very high voltages. Do not touch the ignition system; high voltage can be fatal. Fuses There are three fuse boxes in the vehicle: in the passenger compartment on the far left of the dashboard, in the luggage compartment on the left in the stowage compartment, and in the engine compartment front left. Self-help Picture no: 17747j.tif It is advisable to carry a full set of fuses – available from any Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Spare fuses are kept on back of fuse box cover at instrument panel. For opening cover – see next page. Picture no: 17748j.tif Before replacing a fuse, turn off the respective switch and the ignition. A defective fuse (Fig. 17259 T) can be recognised by its melted wire. A new fuse should only be installed after the cause of the fault has been rectified. There is fuse extractor on the rear of the fuse box cover on the instrument panel for changing fuses – see figure above. Picture no: 17259t.tif 247 Only fit fuses of the specified current rating. Each fuse has its current rating written on it, in addition the ratings are colour coded. Fuse colour Brownish yellow Brown Red Blue Yellow Transparent Green Orange Dark blue Fuse rating 5A 7.5 A 10 A 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A 60 A 248 Self-help No. Circuit Picture no: 17749j.tif Picture no: 17750j.tif Fuses and the most important circuits they protect Some circuits may be protected by several fuses. Fuse box in passenger compartment The fuse box is on the left, on the outside of the instrument panel. Open door. Disengage cover by pulling firmly and remove. No. Circuit Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 246. 1 Infotainment system 2 Interior fan, heating, air conditioning system 3 Sun roof 4 – 5 Door module control unit 6 Brake light 7 Bodywork module control unit 8 Control unit front passenger door module 9 Central control unit Rating 20 A 7.5 A 20 A – 7.5 A 7.5 A 30 A 30 A 7.5 A 10 Control unit Steering column module 11 Diagnostics plug 12 Battery overload protection 13 – 14 – 15 Door module control unit 16 – 17 Instruments, information display 18 Ignition terminal 15 Air conditioning 19 – 20 Yaw rate sensor (ESP®Plus ) 21 Infotainment system 22 Cigarette lighter 23 Interior fan, air conditioning, climate control system 24 – 25 Heating, air conditioning system 26 Instruments, information display 27 – Rating 7.5 A 7.5 A 15 A – – 30 A – 15 A 7.5 A – 7.5 A 7.5 A 30 A 30 A 40 A – 7.5 A 7.5 A – Self-help No. Circuit 11 12 13 14 15 Picture no: 17610j.tif Fuse box in luggage compartment The fuse box is located on the left side of the luggage compartment, in the stowage compartment. Saloon / hatch: press the latch down and open the cover. Estate: press both latches down and open the cover and interior trim. Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 246. 16 17 18 Picture no: 17751j.tif Some circuits may be protected by several fuses. No. Circuit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 – – Electric seat adjustment Heated rear window Electric seat adjustment Electric window operation, right rear Electric window operation, left rear Seat heating, rear right Horn, Vauxhall alarm system Fuel pump Rating – – 40 A 40 A 40 A 30 A 30 A 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 15 A 15 A 20 A 28 29 Battery voltage Seat heating, rear left Towing equipment Tailgate wiper Heated seats, seat climate control, left front Seat heating, front right Accessory socket Tailgate locking, estate Terminal 30 Fuel filler cap locking Ultrasonic sensor, Vauxhall alarm system Electrically operated tailgate Glass breakage sensor (Vauxhall alarm system) Battery voltage Electronic chassis Terminal 15 (ignition lock) Seat occupancy recognition, tyre pressure monitoring system Rain sensor, air conditioning system Parking distance sensor – 249 Rating 25 A 15 A 20 A 15 A 15 A 15 A 15 A 30 A 10 A 7.5 A 5A 30 A 7.5 A 25 A 10 A 25 A 5A 7.5 A – 250 Self-help Some circuits may be protected by several fuses. No. Circuit Picture no: \17731j.tif Fuse box in engine compartment The fuse box is in the box at the front left side of the engine compartment. 9 Warning Switch off engine before opening the fuse box in the engine compartment, risk of injury. To open, disengage front battery cover and tilt upwards. Picture no: 17752j.tif Disengage the bar at the front of the cover of fuse box and swing it upwards. Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 246. 1 Engine electronics, transmission electronics 2 Starter 3 Horn 4 Air conditioning system, climate control system 5 Windscreen wash system 6 – Rating 20 A 25 A 20 A 10 A 15 A – Self-help No. Circuit Picture no: 17753j.tif No. Circuit 7 Central control unit, ESP®Plus 8 Headlights, windscreen washing nozzles 9 Power steering 10 Adaptive Forward Lighting 11 Windscreen wiper 12 Central control unit, ESP®Plus 13 Headlight wash system 14 Oxygen sensor 15 Engine control unit1) 16 ABS 1) Rating 15 A 10 A 7.5 A 10 A 30 A 7.5 A 30 A 10 A 10 A 5A The brake lights are on all the time if the fuse is defective and the ignition is switched on. No. Circuit Picture no: 17 – 18 – 19 Adaptive Forward Lighting, headlight range adjustment, xenon headlight system 20 Headlight range adjustment 21 – 22 Windscreen wiper 23 Auxiliary heating 24 Battery voltage, terminal 30 25 Battery voltage, terminal 30 26 – 27 Easytronic 28 Tailgate module control unit 29 ABS 30 Tailgate module control unit 31 Vehicle interior module control unit 32 ABS 33 Vehicle interior module control unit 34 Tailgate module control unit 35 Cooling fa1) Rating – – 15 A 5A 15 A 251 Rating 30 A 60 A 40 A 60 A 60 A 40 A 60 A 60 A 30 A 40 A 20 A 36 Cooling fa1) 30 A 37 Adaptive Forward Lighting any (AFL): Slot for changing to maxisymmetrical dipped beam fuse for driving abroad, see page 135 38 – – 5A – 30 A 20 A 30 A 30 A – 1) Depending on engine. 252 Self-help Bulb replacement Headlight aiming We recommend that headlight aiming be carried out by your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will have special equipment. Before replacing a bulb, switch ignition off and switch relevant switch off. Only hold new bulb at base! Do not touch the bulb glass with bare hands, otherwise fingerprints on the glass evaporate. Residue builds up on the reflector eventually resulting in a dull reflector. Inadvertently stained bulbs may be cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using alcohol or white spirits. Replacement bulb must be in accordance with data on base of defective bulb. Do not exceed wattage given on bulb base. When adjusting headlights, headlight range adjustment must be set to 0. Picture no: 17754j.tif To change the lights on the left-hand side, remove filler neck from windscreen wash system bottle to gain better access: disengage retaining clamp and withdraw filler neck by pulling upwards. Wash fluid may escape if the bottle is full. 9 Warning Protect the environment. Do not allow wash fluid to seep into the ground or drain into the sewage system. As the headlight must be removed, entrust bulb replacement on the right side to a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Self-help Picture no: 17755j.tif Picture no: 17756j.tif Halogen headlight system dipped and main beam Dipped beam Headlights with separate systems for main beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2 (outer bulbs). 2. To replace the bulb on the left side, remove the filler neck of the screen wash bottle – see page 252. As the headlight must be removed, entrust bulb replacement on the right side to a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 1. Open bonnet. 3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise and remove. 253 Picture no: 17757j.tif 4. Push down bulb at bulb holder. 6 254 Self-help Picture no: 17758j.tif 5. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from the reflector. Picture no: 17270t.tif Picture no: 17759j.tif 6. Detach bulb from bulb mounting. Main beam 7. Insert new bulb into bulb mounting, without touching the glass. 1. Open bonnet. 8. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on the bulb mounting engage in the recesses in the reflector. 9. Engage the bulb holder. 10. Reposition the headlight cover and turn it clockwise. 11. After changing bulbs on the left-hand side, refit the filler neck of the headlight wash bottle and click it home. 2. To replace the bulb on the left side, remove the filler neck of the screen wash bottle – see page 252. As the headlight must be removed, entrust bulb replacement on the right side to a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise and remove. 4. Detach plug connector from bulb. Self-help Picture no: 17760j.tif 5. Press spring wire clip forward, disengage to the right and open. Picture no: 17761j.tif 6. Remove bulb from reflector housing. 7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the lugs in the recesses on the reflector without touching the glass. 8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector onto bulb. 255 Picture no: 17764j.tif Xenon headlight system, dipped and main beam Headlights with separate systems for main beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2 (outer bulbs). Dipped beam 9. Reposition the headlight cover and turn it clockwise. 9 Warning 10. After changing bulbs on the left-hand side, refit the filler neck of the headlight wash bottle and click it home. The dipped beam operates at very high voltage. Do not touch; high voltage can be fatal. Have bulbs changed by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 6 256 Self-help Picture no: 17759j.tif Main beam 1. Open bonnet. 2. To replace the bulb on the left side, remove the filler neck of the screen wash bottle – see page 252. As the headlight must be removed, entrust bulb replacement on the right side to a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise and remove. 4. Detach plug connector from bulb. Picture no: 17760j.tif 5. Press spring wire clip forward, disengage to the right and open. Picture no: 17761j.tif 6. Remove bulb from reflector housing. 7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the lugs in the recesses on the reflector without touching the glass. 8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector onto bulb. 9. Reposition the headlight cover and turn it clockwise. 10. After changing bulbs on the left-hand side, refit the filler neck of the headlight wash bottle and click it home. Self-help 257 Adaptive Forward Lighting System 3 Xenon headlight system for main and dipped beam together with curve illumination based on steering angle. 9 Warning Xenon headlights operate at extremely high electrical voltage. Do not touch. Danger to life. The bulbs for dipped beam, main beam, turn lighting, parking lights and turn signals should only be replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17759j.tif Halogen headlight system, Xenon headlight system, Parking lights 1. Open bonnet. 2. To replace the bulb on the left side, remove the filler neck of the screen wash bottle – see page 252. As the headlight must be removed, entrust bulb replacement on the right side to a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise and remove. Picture no: 17762j.tif 4. Remove parking light bulb holder from reflector. 6 258 Self-help Halogen headlight system, Xenon headlight system, Front indicator lights Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Side turn signal lights Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17763j.tif 5. Remove bulb from socket. 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 7. Insert socket in reflector, position headlight cover and turn clockwise. 8. After changing bulbs on the left-hand side, refit the filler neck of the headlight wash bottle and click it home. Fog lights 3 Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17610j.tif Tail lights Saloon / hatch 1. To open the stowage compartment, press down bar and open the cover. Self-help 259 4. Remove bulb from socket. 5. Insert new bulb without touching the glass. Fit bulb mounting into bulb housing. Connect plug. Close stowage compartment. Picture no: 17767j.tif 2. Detach plug connector from bulb mounting. 3. Press the two retaining lugs on outer edges of bulb mounting towards each other and remove bulb mounting. Bulbs from top to bottom: Turn signal light Tail light/brake light Tail light Fog tail light Reversing light Picture no: 17768j.tif Estate 1. Open the compartment on the left or right-hand side by pressing the latch down – see page 235. 2. Hold the bulb housing from the outside, use a wheel bolt spanner 3 to loosen the retaining nuts and unscrew them by hand. Remove the bulb housing to the rear. Wheel bolt spanner 3 – see vehicle tools, page 238. 3. Detach the cable from the bulb housing. 6 260 Self-help Picture no: 17769j.tif 4. Undo the three screws using a screwdriver and detach the bulb mounting. Picture no: 17770j.tif 5. Remove the bulb from the socket. Bulbs in bulb mounting: 1 = Brake/tail light 2 = Turn signal light 6. Fit a new bulb without touching the glass. Refit the bulb mounting and screw it into place. Position the light housing in the vehicle body and screw it into place. Close the compartment in the side trim. Picture no: 17771j.tif Tailgate lights We recommend that you have bulbs changed by a workshop because of the effort involved. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 1. Use a screwdriver to prise off the plastic plugs in the tailgate panelling to the right and left of the tailgate lock. Self-help Picture no: 17772j.tif 2. Undo screws in handle of inner panelling with torx screwdriver. 3. Remove the inner panelling and clips from the tailgate. Picture no: 17773j.tif 4. Unscrew the mounting in question: 1 = Tail light 2 = Fog tail light 3 = Reversing light 5. Remove bulb from socket. 6. Fit a new bulb without touching the glass. Refit the mounting in the tailgate. 7. Refit the inner panelling to the tailgate using the clips. Tighten the screw in the handle. Refit the plastic plugs in the openings. Lights in electrically operated tailgate 3 Have bulbs replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 261 Picture no: 17297t.tif Number plate light 1. Insert screwdriver vertically in bulb insert as illustrated in figure. Press to the side and release spring. 6 262 Self-help Picture no: 17298t.tif Picture no: 17299t.tif 2. Remove bulb housing downward, taking care not to pull on the cable. 4. Rotate bulb holder to left and disengage. 3. Lift flap and disconnect plug from bulb socket. 5. Remove bulb from socket. 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 7. Insert light holder in light housing and engage by rotating clockwise. 8. Connect plug to bulb socket. 9. Insert and engage bulb housing. Picture no: 17774j.tif Courtesy light Front courtesy light, reading lights 3 To ensure that no power is supplied to the lights, close the doors before removing. 1. Lever the lens out of the housing recesses. Self-help Picture no: 17775j.tif 2. Remove bulb from socket. 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 4. Mount lens and engage in position. Rear courtesy lights 3, rear reading lights 3 Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17301t.tif Glove compartment lighting, luggage compartment lighting, foot well lighting 3 To ensure that no power is supplied to the lights, close the doors or hold the contact switch depressed before removing. 1. Prise the light out with a screwdriver. 263 Picture no: 17302t.tif 2. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip and remove. 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 4. Insert light in opening and engage in position. Instrument illumination, Information display illumination 3 Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 264 If you have a problem If you have a problem In our experience, the most common cause of all complaints is the result of misunderstanding or lack of communication between the customer and the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. We sincerely hope you will never have cause to complain about your vehicle. However, if things do go wrong, the best course of action for you to take is to contact your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer’s Service Reception Staff and explain the difficulty you are having. We are confident they will do their utmost to resolve the problem to your complete satisfaction. Sometimes, however, despite the best of intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your problem has not been resolved to your satisfaction, please make an appointment to discuss the matter with the Manager of the department concerned. The majority of areas of concern can be quickly resolved in this way. Should you wish to pursue the matter further, the Principal of the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer should be made aware of your concern. It is advisable in cases such as this to write to him to confirm your problem and the solutions that have been offered. You can be assured the Authorised Repairer’s Principal will only be too anxious to fully investigate your problems and correct any errors made. After all, he has a large investment in his business and is proud of his reputation and professionalism and fully realises that satisfied customers are his key to success. In the unlikely event that you are still not happy with the answer your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer has given, or the action he proposes to correct the problem, you may contact the Customer Care Department1) where a team of Customer Care Consultants will spare no effort to ensure your complete satisfaction. Vauxhall Motors Ltd. Customer Care, Griffin House, Osborne Road, LUTON, Beds., LU1 3YT Telephone: 0845 090 2044 They will review all the facts involved. Then if it is felt some further action can be taken, the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be advised accordingly. In any case, your contact will be acknowledged confirming Vauxhall Motors’ position in the matter. 1) Calls may be monitored and recorded for training purposes. If you are not satisfied with the outcome, you can if you wish, seek advice from an independent third party such as: Automobile Association (A.A.) Fanum House, BASINGSTOKE, Hants., RG21 2EA Royal Automobile Club (R.A.C.), R.A.C. Motoring Services Ltd., 89-91 Pall Mall, LONDON, SW1Y S45 The Customer Relations Department, Society of Motor Manufacturers and Traders Ltd. (S.M.M.T.), Forbes House, Halkin Street, LONDON, SW1X 7DS Customer Complaints Service, Scottish Motor Trade Association, (S.M.T.A.), 3 Palmerston Place, EDINBURGH, EH12 5AQ The National Conciliation Service, Retail Motor Industry Federation, 9 North Street, RUGBY, CV21 2AB If you have a problem whilst abroad: The Service Departments of Adam Opel GmbH and General Motors branches everywhere will provide information and assistance: In Luxembourg please contact the General Motors Service Department in Antwerp – Belgium Telephone 00 32-34 50 63 29 If you have a problem General Motors Austria GmbH Groß-Enzersdorfer Str. 59 1220 Vienna – Austria Tel. 00 43 1-2 88 77 444 or 00 43-1-2 88 77 0 General Motors Belgium N.V. Noorderlaan 401 – Haven 500 2030 Antwerp – Belgium Telephone 00 32-34 50 63 29 General Motors Southeast Europe, org. složka Olbrachtova 9 140 00 Prague – Czech Republic Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321 General Motors Denmark Jaegersborg Alle 4 2920 Charlottenlund – Denmark Telephone 00 45-39 97 85 00 Vauxhall Motors Ltd. Customer Care Griffin House, Osborne Road Luton, Bedfordshire, LU1 3YT – England Tel. 00 44-845 090 2044 General Motors Finland Oy Pajuniityntie 5 00320 Helsinki – Finland Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47 General Motors France 1 – 9, avenue du Marais Angle Quai de Bezons 95101 Argenteuil Cedex – France Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51 ADAM OPEL GmbH Bahnhofsplatz 1 65423 Rüsselsheim – Germany Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or 00 49-61 42-7 70 General Motors Hellas S.A. 56 Kifisias Avenue & Delfon str. Amarousion 151 25 Athens – Greece Tel 00 30-1-6 80 65 01 General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd. Szabadsag utca 117 2040 Budaörs – Hungary Tel. 00 36-23 446 100 General Motors India Sixth Floor, Tower A, Global Business Park Mehrauli – Gurgaon Road Gurgaon – 122 022, Haryana – India Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333 General Motors Ireland Ltd. Opel House, Unit 60, Heather Road Sandyford, Dublin 18 – Ireland Tel. 00 353-1-216 10 00 General Motors Italia Srl Piazzale dell’Industria 40 00144 Rome – Italy Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51 General Motors Nederland B.V. Lage Mosten 49 – 63 4822 NK Breda – Netherlands Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00 General Motors Norge AS Kjeller-Vest 6 2027 Kjeller – Norway Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04 General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o. Domaniewska 41 06-672 Warsaw – Poland Tel. 00 48- 22-606 17 00 General Motors Portugal Quinta da Fonte Edificío Fernão Magalhães, Piso 2 2780-190 Paço d’Arcos – Portugal Tel. 00 351- 21 440 75 00 General Motors Southeast Europe, org. zložka Apollo Business Centre Mlynské Nivy 45 821 09 Bratislava – Slovakia Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543 General Motors España S.L. Paseo de la Castellana, 91 28046 Madrid – Spain Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25 General Motors Norden AB Årstaängvägen 17 100 73 Stockholm – Sweden Tel. 00 46-20 333 000 General Motors Suisse S.A. Stelzenstraße 4 8152 Glattbrugg – Switzerland Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80 General Motors Türkiye Ltd. Sti. Kemalpasa yolu üzeri 35861 Torbali/Izmir – Turkey Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53 In Albania, Bosnia-Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia, Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania, Serbia-Montenegro and Slovenia please contact the General Motors Service Department in Budaörs – Hungary Tel. 00 36-23 446 100 265 266 Maintenance, Inspection System Maintenance, Inspection System The service interval display takes account of off-the-road periods during which the battery is disconnected. For vehicles with flexible oil change and service intervals, the length of these intervals is based on several parameters stemming from usage. For this reason, various engine-specific data is continually gathered and is used to calculate the remaining distance until the next service. Picture no: 17858j.tif A note on safety .................................. Checking and topping up fluids ......... Engine oil .............................................. Diesel fuel filter .................................... Coolant ................................................. Brake fluid ............................................ Windscreen wiper ................................ Windscreen and headlight wash systems 3........................................... Battery .................................................. Protecting electronic components ..... Vehicle decommissioning.................... Vehicle recommissioning..................... 267 267 268 270 270 272 273 275 276 276 277 277 In order to guarantee economical and safe vehicle operation and to maintain the value of your vehicle, it is of vital importance that all maintenance work is carried out at the proper intervals as specified by Vauxhall. In vehicles with a fixed oil change and service interval, InSP appears in the odometer display when the ignition is switched on and off. Have the service work carried out within one week or 300 miles (500 km). We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The remaining distance can be seen in the odometer display when the ignition is off: Press the reset button next to the trip odometer. InSP and the remaining distance will be displayed. If the remaining distance is less than 1000 miles (1500 km), InSP is displayed with a remaining distance of 600 miles (1000 km) when the ignition is switched on. InSP is displayed for several seconds if the remaining distance is less than 300 miles (500 km). Have the service work that is due carried out within one week or 300 miles (500 km). Have this work carried out by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer in order to avoid invalidation of warranty claims. Maintenance, Inspection System 267 Further information on maintenance and the inspection system can be found in the service booklet, which is in the glove compartment. Have maintenance work, as well as repairs to the bodywork and equipment, carried out by a professional. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who is familiar with Vauxhall vehicles and in possession of the necessary special tools and the latest service instructions from Vauxhall. It is particularly advisable to use a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer during the warranty period to avoid invalidation of warranty claims. See the Service Booklet for further information. Separate anti-corrosion service Have the work carried out at the intervals specified in the Service Booklet. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17304t.tif A note on safety Always switch ignition off when performing checks in the engine compartment (e. g. checking the brake fluid level or the engine oil level) because of risk of injury from live cables and rotating parts. 9 Warning The cooling fan is controlled by a thermoswitch and can therefore start unexpectedly even if the ignition is switched off. Risk of injury. Electronic ignition systems generate very high voltages. Do not touch the ignition system; high voltage can be fatal. Picture no: 17776j.tif Never carry out any repairs or adjustment and maintenance work on the vehicle yourself. This especially applies to the engine, chassis and safety parts. You may unwittingly infringe the provisions of the law and, by not performing the work properly, endanger yourself and other road users. Checking and topping up fluids To aid identification, the caps used when topping up engine oil, coolant and wash fluid as well as the oil dipstick are coloured yellow. 268 Maintenance, Inspection System Picture no: 17777j.tif Engine oil Information on engine oils is found in the Service Booklet. Engine oil level and consumption Every engine consumes engine oil for technical reasons. The engine oil consumption cannot be assessed until a fairly long distance has been driven, and may be above the specified value when the vehicle is first being driven (run-in period). Frequent driving at high revs increases engine oil consumption. Picture no: 17778j.tif In vehicles with engine oil level monitoring 3, the engine oil level is monitored automatically, see page 38. It is advisable to check the oil level before setting out on long journeys. 9 Warning It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of an appropriate quality oil in the engine. Picture no: 17779j.tif Checking the engine oil level, topping up engine oil The figures on this page show examples of the checks for various petrol and diesel engines. Fig. 17780 J on the next page shows the checks for engine Z 30 DT1). The oil level must be checked with the vehicle on a level surface and with the engine (which must be at operating temperature) switched off. Wait at least 5 minutes before checking the level to allow the normal engine oil accumulation in the engine to drain into the oil pan. 1) Sales designation – see page 285. Maintenance, Inspection System Picture no: 17780j.tif Picture no: 17781j.tif To check the engine oil level, insert wiped oil dipstick into handle as far as it will go. Top engine oil up if the level has dropped into the range of the top-up mark MIN. Top up with the same brand of engine oil that was used during the previous oil change, following the instructions in the service booklet. The engine oil level must not exceed the upper mark MAX on the dipstick. Excess engine oil must be drained off or extracted. If the engine oil level is above the MAX mark there is a risk of damage to the engine or the catalytic converter. To close, position the cap and screw it into place. The amount filled must be between the MIN and MAX marks – see page 308. Capacities – see page 308. 269 Picture no: 17782j.tif Engine oil change, oil filter change Change the oil at the displayed service intervals. We recommend that you use genuine Vauxhall engine oil filters. 9 Warning We recommend that you entrust engine oil and filter changes to a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who is familiar with legal requirements regarding disposal of used oil and oil filters and can thus help to protect both the environment and your health. 270 Maintenance, Inspection System Diesel fuel filter Coolant Check fuel filter for any water residue when each engine oil change takes place. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. During operation the system is pressurised. The temperature may therefore rise briefly to over 100 °C. For engines1) Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL and Z 19 DTH, control indicator A illuminates if there is water in the diesel fuel filter. Have fuel filter checked at shorter intervals if the vehicle is subjected to extreme operating conditions such as high humidity (primarily in coastal areas), extremely high or low outside temperatures and substantially varying daytime and nighttime temperatures. The glycol-based coolant provides excellent corrosion protection for the heating and cooling systems as well as antifreeze protection down to –28 °C. It remains in the cooling system throughout the year and need not be changed. Use of certain antifreezes can lead to engine damage. We therefore recommend that you use antifreezes that have been approved by Vauxhall. 9 Warning Antifreeze is a danger to health; it must therefore be kept in the original container and out of the reach of children. Picture no: 17783j.tif Antifreeze and corrosion protection Before the start of the cold weather season, have the coolant checked for correct concentration. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The amount of antifreeze must provide protection down to approx. –28 °C. If the antifreeze concentration is too low, this reduces protection from freezing and corrosion. Top up antifreeze if necessary. If coolant loss is topped up with water, have concentration checked and add antifreeze if necessary. 1) Sales designation – see page 284. Maintenance, Inspection System 271 When the engine is at operating temperature, coolant level rises. It falls again when the system cools. If it falls below the KALT/COLD mark when the system is cold, top up to the mark. Top up antifreeze. If no antifreeze is available, top up with clean tap water. If tap water is unavailable, distilled water can be used. Picture no: 17784j.tif Coolant level Hardly any losses occur since the cooling system is sealed and it is thus rarely necessary to top up the coolant. 4-cylinder petrol and diesel engines: When the cooling system is cold, the coolant level in the expansion tank should be slightly above the KALT/COLD mark. Coolant level can be read off from the outside of the expansion tank. Picture no: 17862j.tif For V6 petrol and diesel engines, the expansion tank must be opened in order to check coolant level. When the cooling system is cold, the coolant should be up to the COLD mark on the filler opening. 9 Warning Allow engine to cool down before removing coolant filler cap. Remove filler cap carefully so that pressure can escape slowly, otherwise there is a risk of scalding. After topping up with drinking water or distilled water, check anti-freeze concentration and add anti-freeze if necessary. Have cause of anti-freeze loss remedied. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. To close, position the cap and screw it into place. 6 272 Maintenance, Inspection System Coolant temperature If the temperature gauge enters the righthand (warning) zone or control indicator W illuminates, check the coolant level immediately. The use of certain brake fluids can cause damage or loss of braking power. We therefore recommend the use of highperformance brake fluid that has been approved by Vauxhall if necessary. z Coolant level low: Top up coolant. Pay attention to the instructions given under "Antifreeze and corrosion protection" and "Coolant level". Have the cause of coolant loss remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Extreme cleanliness is needed when topping up, since contamination in the brake fluid can cause brake system malfunctions. z Coolant level OK: Have the cause of increased coolant temperature remedied. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17786j.tif Brake fluid Brake fluid level 9 Warning Brake fluid is poisonous and corrosive. Do not allow it to come into contact with eyes, skin, fabric or painted surfaces. Direct contact could cause injury and damage. The fluid level in the reservoir must be neither higher than the MAX mark nor lower than the MIN mark. After correcting the brake fluid level, have the cause of brake fluid loss remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Maintenance, Inspection System Brake fluid change Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it absorbs water. If the brakes become hot, such as when driving on long downhill stretches, vapour bubbles can occur in the water, which can have an extremely adverse effect on braking power (depending on the proportion of water). Windscreen wiper The fluid change intervals specified in the Service Booklet must therefore be observed. If the windscreen is dirty, operate the windscreen wash system before switching on the windscreen wiper or setting the wiper to automatic operation with the rain sensor 3. This will avoid wiper blade wear. 9 Warning We recommend that you have brake fluid changed by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will be familiar with the requirements of the law as regards disposal of brake fluid and can thus help to protect the environment and your health. Clear vision is essential for safe driving. Perform regular checks on the windscreen wiper and headlight wash systems 3 to ensure they are operating correctly. We recommend wiper blade replacement at least once a year. Do not switch on the windscreen wiper or set them to automatic operation with the rain sensor 3 if the windscreen is iced up as this could damage the wiper blades or the wiper system. 273 If the wiper becomes frozen on to the glass, we recommend that they be released with the aid of Vauxhall De-icer Spray. Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent. Wiper blades whose lips have become hardened, cracked or covered with silicone must be replaced. This may be necessary as a result of the effects of ice, thawing salt or heat, or the incorrect use of cleaning agents. Switch off the windscreen wiper or automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 in car washes, see pages 17, 279. Windscreen wiper blade maintenance, see page 280. 6 274 Maintenance, Inspection System Picture no: 17315t.tif To ensure proper operation of the rain sensor 3, the sensor area must be free from dust, dirt and ice. The windscreen wash system must also be operated at regular intervals and the sensor area must be deiced. Vehicles with rain sensor 3 can be identified by the sensor area near the top of the windscreen. Picture no: 17787j.tif Service setting for front windscreen wiper (e.g. for changing or cleaning the front wiper blades). Within 8 seconds of switching off the engine but with the key in the ignition switch, press the windscreen wiper stalk downward. Release the stalk as soon as the wiper blades are vertical. Picture no: 17788j.tif Wiper blades on the windscreen Activating service position, see preceding column. Lift wiper arm. Press the release lever and detach the wiper blade. Maintenance, Inspection System Fill only with clean water to prevent the nozzles from clogging. To improve cleaning efficiency, we recommend that you add a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent. The windscreen wash system and headlight wash system will not freeze in winter: Frost protection down to – 5 °C – 10 °C – 20 °C – 30 °C Picture no: 17789j.tif Windscreen and headlight wash systems 3 The filler neck of the windscreen washing system and headlight washing system bottle 3 is at the front left of the engine compartment next to the battery. The fluid level in the reservoir can be read off from the level indicator. Do not fill above 1/1. Capacities – see page 308. 275 Mixture Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent: Water 1: 3 1: 2 1: 1 2: 1 When closing the reservoir, press the lid firmly over the beaded edge all the way round. 276 Maintenance, Inspection System Laying up the vehicle for more than 4 weeks can lead to battery discharge, which may reduce the service life of the battery. Disconnect battery from on-board power supply by detaching negative terminal (Vauxhall alarm system 3 is then disabled). Protecting electronic components Ensure that ignition is switched off before connecting battery. Then perform the following actions: To avoid damaging the vehicle, do not make any modifications to the electrical system, e.g. connecting additional consumers or tampering with electronic control units (chip tuning). z Setting date and time in the information display – see pages 44, 47, 52. Battery Picture no: 17320t.tif The battery is maintenance-free. 9 Warning We recommend that you have battery changes carried out by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. They know the laws concerning the disposal of used batteries and therefore protects the environment and your health. Retrofitted electrical or electronic accessories can place an additional load on the battery or even discharge the battery. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer regarding technical possibilities, such as fitting a more powerful battery. z Activate window and sun roof electronics 3 if necessary – see pages 138, 141. In order to prevent the battery from discharging, some consumers such as the courtesy light automatically switch off after approx. 20 minutes. In order to prevent faults in electronic components in the electrical system, never connect or disconnect battery with engine running or ignition switched on. Never start engine with battery disconnected, e.g. when starting using jump leads. 9 Warning Electronic ignition systems generate very high voltages. Do not touch the ignition system; high voltage can be fatal. Disconnecting/connecting vehicle battery from/to electrical system Disconnect the battery from the vehicle electrical system before charging: First detach the negative and then the positive lead. Do not reverse the polarity of the battery, i.e. do not confuse the terminals for the positive and negative leads. When connecting, start with the positive lead and then connect the negative lead. Maintenance, Inspection System Vehicle decommissioning Observe national regulations. If the vehicle is decommissioned for several months, the following work must be carried out in order to prevent damage. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z Wash and preserve the vehicle – see page 279. z Check corrosion protection in engine compartment and on underbody and repair if necessary. z Clean and preserve rubber seals on bonnet and doors. z Change engine oil see page 269. z Check antifreeze and corrosion protection – see page 270. z Check the coolant level, top up with antifreeze if necessary – see page 271. z Empty windscreen wash system and headlight wash system. z Increase tyre pressure to value specified for full load, see page 299. Vehicle storage z Park vehicle in dry, well ventilated place. With manual transmission or Easytronic 3, engage 1st or reverse gear. With automatic transmission 3, selector lever in P. Use chocks or the like to prevent the vehicle from rolling. 277 Vehicle recommissioning Observe national regulations. Perform the following work before recommissioning the vehicle: z Connect battery – see page 276. z Do not apply hand brake. z Check tyre pressure and correct if necessary – see page 299. z Disconnect battery by disengaging negative terminal from vehicle electrical system – see page 276. z Fill up windscreen wash system – see page 275. z Check engine oil level – see page 268. z Check the coolant level; top up with antifreeze if necessary – see page 271. z Fit the number plate if necessary. 278 Vehicle care Vehicle care Consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer with regard to care aids tested and recommended by Vauxhall. When caring for your vehicle, observe all national environmental regulations, particularly when washing it. Vehicle care aids 3.............................. Washing ............................................... Waxing ................................................. Polishing ............................................... Wheels .................................................. Paintwork damage .............................. .............................................................. Exterior lights ....................................... Plastic and rubber parts ..................... Wheels and tyres ................................. Interior and upholstery........................ Seat belts.............................................. Windows ............................................... Windscreen wiper blades .................... Locks..................................................... Engine compartment........................... Underbody ........................................... 278 279 279 279 279 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 280 281 281 281 281 Regular, thorough care helps to improve the appearance of your vehicle and maintain its value over the years. It is also prerequisite for warranty claims for any paint or corrosion damage. The following pages contain tips for vehicle care which, if used properly, will help combat the unavoidable damaging effects of the environment. Vehicle care aids 3 Vehicle wash: z Wash brush z Shampoo z Sponge z Insect Removal Sponge z Chamois Vehicle care: z Paintwork Cleaner z Paintwork Polish z Cream Polish z Metallic Paintwork Wax z Hard wax z Vauxhall Touch-Up Paint z Vauxhall Touch-Up/Aerosol Paint z Wheel Preserver z Insect Remover z Window Cleaner z Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals z Cleaner Vehicle care Washing The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to environmental influences, e.g. continuous changes in weather conditions, industrial waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so wash and wax your vehicle regularly. When using automatic car washes, select a programme which includes waxing. Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, pollen and the like should be cleaned off immediately, as they contain aggressive constituents which can cause paint damage. Please follow the wash system manufacturer’s instructions when using wash systems. The windscreen wiper and the automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 and the rear window wiper 3 must be switched off – see page 16. Unscrew the antenna rod 3 and the roof rack 3, standing on the door sill to make them easier to reach. If you wash your vehicle by hand, make sure that the insides of the wings are also thoroughly rinsed out. Clean edges and folds on opened doors and flaps as well as the areas they cover. Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use separate leathers for paint and window surfaces: remnants of wax on the windows will impair vision. Observe national regulations. Waxing Wax your vehicle regularly, in particular after it has been washed using shampoo and at the latest when water no longer forms beads on the paintwork, otherwise the paintwork will dry out. Also wax edges and folds on opened doors and flaps as well as the areas they cover. 279 Polishing Polishing is necessary only if the paint has become dull or if solid deposits have become attached to it. Paintwork polish with silicone forms a protective film, making waxing unnecessary. Plastic body parts should not be treated with wax and polish. Use Metallic Paintwork Wax on vehicles with a metallic-effect paint finish. Wheels Use a pH-neutral wheel cleaning agent to clean the wheels. Wheels are painted and can be treated with the same agents as the body. For alloy wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel Preserver. 280 Vehicle care Paintwork damage Plastic and rubber parts Seat belts Repair small areas of paint damage such as stone impacts, scratches etc. immediately using a Vauxhall touch-up applicator or Vauxhall spray and touch-up paint before rust can form. If rust has already formed, have the cause remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Please also pay attention to surfaces and edges beneath the vehicle where which rust may have formed unnoticed for some time. For additional cleaning of plastic and rubber parts use Cleaner. Do not use any other agent, and in particular do not use solvents or petrol. Always keep seat belts clean and dry. Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. When cleaning the heated rear window, make sure that the heating element on the inside of the window is not damaged. Exterior lights Headlight and other protective light bezels are made of plastic. If they require additional cleaning after the vehicle has been washed, clean them with Car Shampoo. Do not use any abrasive or caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper, and do not clean them dry. Wheels and tyres Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. Interior and upholstery Clean the vehicle interior, including the instrument panel fascia, using interior cleaner. The instrument panel should only be cleaned using a soft damp cloth. Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use cleaner that is suitable for both fabrics and vinyl. Do not use cleaning agents such as acetone, tetrachloride, paint thinner, paint remover, nail varnish remover, washing powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable. Open velcro fasteners on clothing could damage seat upholstery. Make sure that velcro fasteners are closed. Clean only with lukewarm water or Cleaner. Windows Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather in conjunction with Window Cleaner and Insect Remover. Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is suitable for de-icing windows. For mechanical removal of ice, use a commercially available sharp-edged ice scraper. Press the scraper firmly against the glass so that no dirt can get under it and scratch the glass. Vehicle care Windscreen wiper blades Wax, such as that used in car washes, can cause streaks to form on the windscreen when the wiper are used. Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessary – see page 273. Locks The locks are lubricated with a high-grade lock cylinder grease at the factory. Vauxhall lock cylinder grease prevents the locks from freezing up. Only use de-icing agent in emergencies, as they have a degreasing effect and will impair the function of the locks. After using a de-icing agent, have the locks re-greased. We recommend that you entrust this to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Engine compartment Areas of the engine compartment that are painted in the same colour as the vehicle must be looked after like any other painted surface. It is advisable to wash the engine compartment before and after winter and preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and brake fluid reservoir with plastic sheets before washing the engine. When washing the engine with a steam jet, do not direct the jet at components of the anti-lock brake system, the air conditioning system, the climate control system, the auxiliary heater or the belt drive or its components. Protective wax that has been applied is also removed during the engine wash. For this reason, have the engine, brake system components in the engine compartment, axle components with steering, body parts and cavities thoroughly preserved with protective wax after the wash. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. An engine wash can be performed in the spring in order to remove dirt that has adhered to the engine compartment, which may also have a high salt content. Check protective wax layer and make good if necessary. Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. Underbody Your vehicle has a factory-applied PVC undercoating in the wheel arches (including the longitudinal members) which provides permanent protection and needs no special maintenance. 281 The surfaces of the vehicle underbody not covered by PVC are provided a durable protective wax coating in critical areas. On vehicles which are washed frequently in automatic car washes with underbody washing facility, the protective wax coating may be impaired by dirt-dissolving additives, so check the underbody after washing and have it waxed if necessary. Before the start of the cold weather season, check the PVC coating and protective wax coating and, if necessary, have them restored to perfect condition. Caution - commercially available bitumen/ rubber materials can damage the PVC coating. We recommend that you have underbody work carried out by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who knows the prescribed materials and has experience in the use thereof. The underbody should be washed following the end of the cold weather season to remove any dirt adhering to the underbody since this may also contain salt. Check protective wax coating and, if necessary, have it restored to perfect condition. 282 Technical Data Technical Data Vehicle documents, identification plate ................................................... Vehicle identification data.................. Coolant, brake fluid, oils ..................... Engine data.......................................... Performance......................................... Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions ...... Weights, payload and roof load ........ Tyres ..................................................... Electrical system .................................. Capacities ............................................ Dimensions ........................................... Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment............................. Picture no: 17321t.tif 282 283 283 284 286 288 293 299 307 308 310 311 Vehicle documents, identification plate The technical data is determined in accordance with European Community standards. We reserve the right to make modifications. Specifications in the vehicle documents always have priority over those given in this manual. The identification plate is affixed to the front right door frame. Picture no: 17322t.tif Information on identification plate: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Manufacturer Type approval number Vehicle identification number Permissible gross vehicle weight Permissible gross train weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Vehicle-specific or country-specific data Technical Data In other design variants, the identification plate may also be affixed to the dashboard. Engine code and engine number: stamped on left-hand side of engine on crankcase. 283 Coolant, brake fluid, oils When topping up – coolant, – brake fluid, – manual transmission oil, – automatic transmission oil, – power steering oil we recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can advise you on the correct products to use. Use of unsuitable fluids can cause serious damage to the vehicle. Picture no: 17323t.tif Vehicle identification data The vehicle identification number is stamped on the identification plate (see previous page) and in the vehicle floor on the right-hand side under a cover between the driver’s door and seat. Engine oils Information on engine oils is found in the Service Booklet. 284 Technical Data Engine data Sales designation Engine identifier code 1.8 Z 18 XE 1.8 Z 18 XER 2.0 Turbo Z 20 NET 2.2 Z 22 SE 2.2 DIRECT Z 22 YH 2.8 V6 Z 28 NEL 4 4 4 4 4 6 Piston displacement (cm ) 1796 1796 1998 2198 2198 2792 Brake horse power (kW/bhp) at rpm 90 6000 103 6300 129 5500 108 5600 114 5600 169 5500 Torque (Nm) at rpm 167 3800 175 3800 265 2500 to 3800 203 4000 220 3800 330 1800 to 4500 Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Octane requirement (RON) unleaded or unleaded or unleaded 95 982) 912)3) 95 982) 912)3) 95 982) 912)4) 95 982) 912)4) 955) 982) –6) 95 982) 912)3) Max. permissible engine speed, continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6500 6500 6200 6500 6500 6700 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 Number of cylinders 3 Type of fuel 1) Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228; value printed in bold: recommended fuel. Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number). Slight reduction in engine output and torque if 91 RON is used. If no unleaded Premium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in mountainous terrain with a caravan/trailer load or high payload. The use of fuel that is at least 95 RON is prescribed. 91 octane fuel must not be used. Technical Data Engine data Sales designation Engine identifier code 2.8 V6 Z 28 NET VXR Z 28 NET 1.9 CDTI Z 19 DTL 1.9 CDTI Z 19 DT 1.9 CDTI Z 19 DTH 3.0 CDTI Z 30 DT 6 6 4 4 4 6 Piston displacement (cm ) 2792 2792 1910 1910 1910 2958 Brake horse power (kW/bhp) at rpm 184 5500 206 5500 74 3500 88 3500 to 4000 110 4000 135 4000 Torque (Nm) at rpm 350 1800 to 4500 355 1800 to 4500 260 280 1700 to 2500 2000 to 2750 320 2000 to 2750 400 1900 to 2700 Petrol Petrol Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Octane requirement (RON) unleaded or unleaded or unleaded Cetane requirement (CN)1) 95 982) 912)3) – 954) 982) –5) – – – – 49 (D)6) – – – 49 (D)4) – – – 49 (D)4) – – – 49 (D)4) Max. permissible engine speed, continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6700 6700 5100 5100 5100 5000 Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 Number of cylinders 3 Type of fuel 1) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228, Diesel DIN EN 590; value printed in bold: recommended fuel. Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number). Slight reduction in engine output and torque if 91 RON is used. Slight reduction in engine output and torque if 95 RON is used. 91 octane fuel must not be used. A lower value is possible with winter fuels. 285 286 Technical Data Performance (approx. mph / km/h), Saloon / hatch Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Maximum speed Manual transmission Sports transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission 126/203 127/205 – – 130/210 130/210 129/207 – – 143/230 – – 134/216 – – 130/210 136/218 136/218 – 130/210 155/250 – – 155/250 Engine1) Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT 155/2503) – – 155/2503) 155/2503) – – 155/2503) 116/186 – – – 124/200 – – – 135/217 – – 130/210 143/230 – – 140/226 2) 2) Maximum speed Manual transmission Sports transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission 1) 2) 3) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerb weight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified maximum speed of the vehicle. The maximum speed is limited electronically. Technical Data Performance (approx. mph / km/h), estate Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Maximum speed Manual transmission Sports transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission – 124/199 – – 126/203 130/209 128/207 – – 139/224 – – 130/210 130/210 – 129/208 152/245 – – 152/245 155/2503) – – 155/2503) Engine1) Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT 155/2503) – – 155/2503) 121/195 – – – 130/210 – – 129/208 140/225 – – 137/221 2) 2) Maximum speed Manual transmission Sports transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission 1) 2) 3) 113/182 – – – Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerb weight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified maximum speed of the vehicle. The maximum speed is limited electronically. 287 288 Technical Data Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions Directive 80/1268/EEC (last changed by 1999/100/EC) has applied for the measurement of fuel consumption since 1996. The directive is oriented to actual driving practices: Urban driving is rated at approx. /3 and extra urban driving with approx. 2/3 (urban and extra-urban consumption). Cold starts and acceleration phases are also taken into consideration. 1 The specification of CO2 emission is also a constituent of the directive. The figures given must not be taken as a guarantee for the actual fuel consumption of a particular vehicle. All values are based on the EU base model with standard equipment. The calculation of fuel consumption as specified by directive 1999/100/EC takes account of the vehicle’s kerb weight, ascertained in accordance with these regulations. Optional extras may result in slightly higher fuel consumption and CO2 emission levels than those quoted. To convert l/100 km into mpg, divide 282 by the number of litres/ 100 km Saving fuel, protecting the environment – see page 188. Technical Data 289 Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Saloon 4-door (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine1) Z 18 XE Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 Z 18 XER Z 22 SE Z 22 YH 10,4/10,7/–/– 10,1/ 9,9/ 9,7/– –/12,5/–/– 5,5/ 5,8/–/– 5,5/ 5,6/ 5,4/– –/ 6,3/–/– 7,3/ 7,6/–/– 7,2/ 7,2/ 7,0/– –/ 8,6/–/– 175/ 182/–/– 173/ 173/ 168/– –/ 206/–/– –/11,4/–/13,3 –/ 6,2/–/ 6,5 –/ 8,1/–/ 9,0 –/ 194/–/ 216 10,3/10,3/–/11,3 6,0/ 5,9/–/ 6,1 7,6/ 7,5/–/ 8,0 182/ 180/–/ 192 Z 28 NET Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT 7,4/–/–/– 4,7/–/–/– 5,7/–/–/– 154/–/–/– 7,4/–/–/ 9,4 4,7/–/–/ 5,3 5,7/–/–/ 6,8 154/–/–/184 9,8/–/–/10,2 5,2/–/–/ 5,3 6,9/–/–/ 7,1 186/–/–/ 192 Engine1) Z 28 NEL Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 15,4/–/–/17,1 15,4/–/–/17,1 7,4/–/–/– 7,3/–/–/ 7,3 7,3/–/–/ 7,3 4,7/–/–/– 10,3/–/–/10,9 10,3/–/–/10,9 5,7/–/–/– 247/–/–/ 262 247/–/–/ 262 154/–/–/– Z 19 DTL Z 20 NET Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Saloon 4-door (tyre width up to 235 mm) Engine1) Z 18 XE Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 Z 18 XER Z 22 SE Z 22 YH 10,5/10,8/–/– 10,2/10,0/ 9,8/– –/12,6/–/– 5,6/ 5,9/–/– 5,6/ 5,7/ 5,5/– –/ 6,4/–/– 7,4/ 7,7/–/– 7,3/ 7,3/ 7,1/– –/ 8,7/–/– 178/ 185/–/– 175/ 175/170/– –/ 209/–/– –/11,5/–/13,4 –/ 6,3/–/ 6,6 – / 8,2/–/ 9,1 – /197/–/ 218 10,4/10,4/–/11,4 6,1/ 6,0/–/ 6,2 7,7/ 7,6/–/ 8,1 185/ 182/–/ 194 Z 28 NET Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT 7,5/–/–/– 4,8/–/–/– 5,8/–/–/– 157/–/–/– 7,5/–/–/ 9,5 4,8/–/–/ 5,4 5,8/–/–/ 6,9 157/–/–/186 9,9/–/–/10,3 5,3/–/–/ 5,4 7,0/–/–/ 7,2 189/–/–/ 194 Engine1) Z 28 NEL Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 15,5/–/–/17,2 15,5/–/–/17,2 7,5/–/–/– 7,4/–/–/ 7,4 7,4/–/–/ 7,4 4,8/–/–/– 10,4/–/–/11,0 10,4/–/–/11,0 5,8/–/–/– 250/–/–/ 264 250/–/–/ 264 157/–/–/– 1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. Z 19 DTL Z 20 NET 290 Technical Data Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 10,4/10,7/–/– 5,5/ 5,8/–/– 7,3/ 7,6/–/– 175/ 182/–/– 10,1/ 9,9/ 9,7/– 5,5/ 5,6/ 5,4/– 7,2/ 7,2/ 7,0/– 173/173/168/– –/12,5/–/– –/ 6,3/–/– –/ 8,6/–/– –/ 206/–/– – /11,4/–/13,3 – / 6,2/–/ 6,5 – / 8,1/–/ 9,0 – / 194/–/ 216 Engine1) Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 10,3/10,3/–/11,3 6,0/ 5,9/–/ 6,1 7,6/ 7,5/–/ 8,0 182/ 180/–/ 192 15,4/–/–/17,1 7,3/–/–/ 7,3 10,3/–/–/10,9 247/–/–/ 262 15,4/–/–/17,1 7,3/–/–/ 7,3 10,3/–/–/10,9 247/–/–/ 262 15,4/–/–/2) 7,3/–/–/2) 10,3/–/–/2) 247/–/–/2) Engine1) Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 7,4/–/–/– 4,7/–/–/– 5,7/–/–/– 154/–/–/– 7,4/–/–/– 4,7/–/–/– 5,7/–/–/– 154/–/–/– 7,4/–/–/ 9,5 4,7/–/–/ 5,4 5,7/–/–/ 6,9 154/–/–/186 9,8/–/–/10,2 5,2/–/–/ 5,3 6,9/–/–/ 7,1 186/–/–/ 192 1) 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. Values not available at time of printing. Technical Data Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 235 mm) Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 10,5/10,8/–/– 5,6/ 5,9/–/– 7,4/ 7,7/–/– 178/ 185/–/– 10,2/10,0/ 9,8/– 5,6/ 5,7/ 5,5/– 7,3/ 7,3/ 7,1/– 175/ 175/ 170/– –/12,6/–/– –/ 6,4/–/– –/ 8,7/–/– –/ 209/–/– – /11,5/–/13,4 – / 6,3/–/ 6,6 – / 8,2/–/ 9,1 – / 197/–/ 218 Engine1) Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 28 NET VXR Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 10,4/10,4/–/11,4 6,1/ 6,0/–/ 6,2 7,7/ 7,6/–/ 8,1 185/ 182/–/ 194 15,5/–/–/17,2 7,4/–/–/ 7,4 10,4/–/–/ 11,0 250/–/–/ 264 15,5/–/–/17,2 7,4/–/–/ 7,4 10,4/–/–/11,0 250/–/–/ 264 15,4/–/–/2) 7,3/–/–/2) 10,3/–/–/2) 247/–/–/2) Engine1) Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 7,5/–/–/– 4,8/–/–/– 5,8/–/–/– 157/–/–/– 7,5/–/–/– 4,8/–/–/– 5,8/–/–/– 157/–/–/– 7,5/–/–/ 9,6 4,8/–/–/ 5,5 5,8/–/–/ 7,0 157/–/–/189 9,9/–/–/10,3 5,3/–/–/ 5,4 7,0/–/–/ 7,2 189/–/–/ 194 1) 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. Values not available at time of printing. 291 292 Technical Data Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine1) Z 18 XE Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 Engine1) Z 28 NET –/11,0/–/– 10,3/10,4/10,0/– –/12,7/–/– 10,6/10,6/–/11,5 –/ 6,1/–/– 5,9/ 6,1/ 5,7/– –/ 6,5/–/– 6,3/ 6,2/–/ 6,3 –/ 7,9/–/– 7,5/ 7,7/ 7,3/– –/ 8,8/–/– 7,9/ 7,8/–/ 8,2 –/ 190/–/– 180/ 185/ 175/– –/ 211/–/– 190/ 187/–/ 197 Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 15,5/–/–/17,4 15,5/–/–/2) 7,4/–/–/ 7,6 7,4/–/–/2) 10,4/–/–/11,2 10,4/–/–/2) 250/–/–/ 269 250/–/–/2) Z 18 XER 7,5/–/–/– 4,8/–/–/– 5,8/–/–/– 157/–/–/– Z 20 NET 7,5/–/–/– 4,8/–/–/– 5,8/–/–/– 157/–/–/– Z 22 YH 7,5/–/–/ 9,6 4,8/–/–/ 5,5 5,8/–/–/ 7,0 157/–/–/189 Z 28 NEL 15,5/–/–/17,4 7,4/–/–/ 7,6 10,4/–/–/11,2 250/–/–/ 269 Z 30 DT 9,8/–/–/10,3 5,2/–/–/ 5,4 6,9/–/–/ 7,2 186/–/–/ 194 Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), estate (tyre width up to 235 mm) Engine1) Z 18 XE Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 Engine1) Z 28 NET –/11,1/–/– 10,4/10,5/10,1/– –/12,8/–/– 10,7/10,7/–/11,6 –/ 6,2/–/– 6,0/ 6,2/ 5,8/– –/ 6,6/–/– 6,4/ 6,3/–/ 6,4 –/ 8,0/–/– 7,6/ 7,8/ 7,4/– –/ 8,9/–/– 8,0/ 7,9/–/ 8,3 –/192/–/– 182/ 187/ 178/– –/ 214/–/– 192/ 190/–/ 199 Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual/sports/Easytronic/automatic transmission urban extra-urban total CO2 15,6/–/–/17,5 15,5/–/–/2) 7,5/–/–/ 7,7 7,4/–/–/2) 10,5/–/–/11,3 10,4/–/–/2) 252/–/–/ 271 250/–/–/2) 1) 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. Values not available at time of printing. Z 18 XER 7,6/–/–/– 4,9/–/–/– 5,9/–/–/– 159/–/–/– Z 20 NET 7,6/–/–/– 4,9/–/–/– 5,9/–/–/– 159/–/–/– Z 22 YH 7,6/–/–/ 9,7 4,9/–/–/ 5,6 5,9/–/–/ 7,1 159/–/–/192 Z 28 NEL 15,6/–/–/17,5 7,5/–/–/ 7,7 10,5/–/–/11,3 252/–/–/ 271 Z 30 DT 9,9/–/–/10,4 5,3/–/–/ 5,5 7,0/–/–/ 7,3 189/–/–/ 197 Technical Data Weights, payload and roof load The payload is the difference between the permitted gross vehicle weight (see identification plate, page 282) and the EC kerb weight. To calculate the kerb weight, enter the data for your vehicle below: z Kerb weight from Table 1, pages 294, 296 +.............. kg z Additional weight of equipment versions from Table 2, page 297 +.............. kg z Weight of heavy accessories from Table 3, page 298 +.............. kg The total =.............. kg is the EC kerb weight. Optional equipment and accessories increase the kerb weight, which means that the payload will also change slightly. Pay attention to weight ranges in vehicle documents and on identification plate. 293 The combined total of front and rear axle loads must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. For example, if the front axle is bearing its maximum permissible load, the rear axle can only bear a load that is equal to the gross vehicle weight minus the front axle load. Roof load The permitted roof load for the saloon is 90 kg, for the estate without roof railing it is 75 kg, and for the estate with roof railing it is 100 kg. The roof load consists of the combined weight of the roof rack and the load. When the caravan/trailer is coupled and the towing vehicle fully loaded (including all occupants), the permissible rear axle load (see identification plate or vehicle documents) may be exceeded by 40 kg. If the permissible rear axle load is exceeded, a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) applies. If national regulations specify a lower maximum speed for vehicles towing a caravan/trailer, this must be observed. Driving hints – see page 186. See the identification plate or vehicle documents for permissible axle loads. Roof rack, see page 220. 294 Technical Data Weights (kg): Table 1, kerb weight1) , Saloon Model Vectra with climate control 1) 2) Engine2) 4-door Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Z 18 XE 1395 – – Z 18 XER 1395 1395 – Z 20 NET 1505 – – Z 22 SE 1460 – 1490 Z 22 YH 1460 – 1490 Z 28 NEL 1565 – 1590 Z 28 NET 1565 – 1590 Z 19 DTL 1505 – – Z 19 DT 1505 – – Z 19 DTH 1503 – 1523 Z 30 DT 1635 – 1660 According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full). Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. Technical Data Weights (kg): Table 1, kerb weight1) , Hatch Model Vectra with climate control 1) 2) Engine2) 5-door Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Z 18 XE 1393 – – Z 18 XER 1393 1393 – Z 20 NET 1503 – – Z 22 SE 1475 – 1505 Z 22 YH 1475 – 1505 Z 28 NEL 1580 – 1605 Z 28 NET 1580 – 1605 Z 19 DTL 1503 – – Z 19 DT 1503 – – Z 19 DTH 1523 – 1548 Z 30 DT 1650 – 1675 According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full). Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 295 296 Technical Data Weights (kg): Table 1, Kerb weight1) , Estate Model Engine2) Estate Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Vectra with climate control Z 18 XE 1475 – – Z 18 XER 1475 1475 – Z 20 NET 1570 – – Z 22 YH 1523 – 1553 1) 2) Z 28 NEL 1613 – 1638 Z 28 NET 1613 – 1638 Z 19 DTL 1585 – – Z 19 DT 1585 – – Z 19 DTH 1600 – 1613 Z 30 DT 1685 – 1710 According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full). Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. Technical Data 297 Weights (kg): Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions Saloon / Hatch Engine1) Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Life 16 16 16 16 16 16 Exclusiv 32 32 32 32 32 32 Design/Elite 31 31 31 31 31 31 SRi 28 28 28 28 28 28 Engine1) Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Life 16 16 16 6 Exclusiv 32 32 32 22 Design/Elite 31 31 31 21 SRi 28 28 28 26 Engine1) Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL Z 28 NET Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Life 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 Exclusiv 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 20 Design/Elite 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 25 SRi 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 26 Estate 1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 298 Technical Data Weights (kg), Table 3, Heavy accessories Saloon / Hatch Accessories Sun roof Towing equipment Weight 17 23 Accessories Sun roof Towing equipment Weight 18 33 Estate Technical Data Tyres Restrictions Not all tyres available on the market currently meet the structural requirements. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning suitable tyre makes. These tyres have undergone special tests to establish their reliability, safety and specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous market monitoring, we are unable to assess these attributes for other tyres, even if they have been granted approval by the relevant authorities or in some other form. Further information – see page 214. Winter tyres 3 Tyres of size 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 and 235/35 R 19 are not to be used as winter tyres. Only the winter tyres specified on page 306 may be used on vehicles factory-fitted with 235/35 R 19 tyres. For Vectra VXR, tyres of size 225/45 R 17 on a Vauxhall-approved alloy wheel with designation 7x17, ET39 as well as tyres of size 235/40 R 18 are permissible as winter tyres. If winter tyres are in use, the spare wheel may still be fitted with a summer tyre. Use of the spare wheel may alter vehicle handling. Obtain a replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have the wheel balanced and fitted to the vehicle. 299 Depending on the version, the spare wheel will be in the form of a temporary spare wheel. The vehicle may handle differently if a spare wheel has been fitted. Further information – see page 219. The spare wheel can be equipped with a smaller tyre and a smaller rim1): the vehicle may handle differently if the spare wheel has been fitted. Tyre chains 3 Replace defective tyre as soon as possible, balance wheel and fit to vehicle. Restrictions Tyre chains may be used on the front wheels only. We recommend the use of Vauxhall-tested fine-mesh tyre chains that add no more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the inboard sides (including chain lock). Tyre chains are not permitted on tyre sizes 115/70 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18, 235/40 R 18 and 235/35 R 19. Further information – see page 219. Wheels Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm. On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare wheel may have a steel rim. Tyre pressure in bar/psi The specified tyre pressures are valid for cold tyres. The increased tyre pressure resulting from extensive driving must not be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on the following pages apply to both summer and winter tyres. Always inflate the spare wheel to the tyre pressure for full load - see tables on following pages. Temporary spare wheel tyre pressure - see tables on next page. In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system 3 there is an adapter in the valve cap key. Screw adapter to valve before attaching tyre pressure gauge – see page 215. Further information – see pages 214 to 219. 1) Country-specific version: The spare wheel is only to be used as a temporary spare wheel. 300 Technical Data (ctd.) Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) Saloon / Hatch Tyre pressure for load of up to 3 people Tyre pressure ECO1) loaded with up to 3 people Tyre pressure for full load Engine 2) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16, 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2,0/29 2,2/32 2,4/35 38/2,6 2,4/35 2,9/42 Z 20 NET 205/55 R 163) 2,4/35 2,4/35 – – 2,5/36 3,0/44 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2,3/33 2,3/33 2,6/38 2,6/38 2,4/35 2,9/42 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16 2,3/33 2,3/33 – – 2,4/35 2,9/42 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2,2/32 2,2/32 2,5/36 2,5/36 2,3/33 2,8/41 T 115/70 R 164) 4,2/61 4,2/61 – – 4,2/61 4,2/61 Z 22 SE, Z 22 YH all 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi. 1) To reduce fuel consumption as much as possible. 2) Sales designation, see pages 284, 285. 3) Only permitted as winter tyres. 4) For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237. Technical Data (ctd.) Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) Saloon / Hatch Front Rear Front Rear Tyres Z 28 NEL, Z 28 NET 215/55 R 162) 2,4/35 2,4/35 2,6/38 3,1/45 172), 2) 215/50 R 225/45 R 17 , 225/45 R 182) 2,6/38 2,4/35 2,8/41 2,3/33 215/55 R 163) 2,5/36 2,3/33 2,7/39 3,2/46 173), 173), 3) 215/50 R 225/45 R 225/45 R 18 2,7/39 2,4/35 2,9/42 3,4/49 235/35 R 19, 235/40 R 18 2,9/42 2,6/38 3,1/45 3,5/51 2,8/41 2,5/36 3,0/44 3,5/51 4,2/61 4,2/61 4,2/61 4,2/61 225/45 R 174) all 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi. Tyre pressure for full load Engine1) Vectra VXR 1) Tyre pressure for load of up to 3 people 301 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) T 115/70 R 16 5) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. Version with manual transmission. Version with automatic transmission. Only permitted as winter tyres on Vauxhall-approved alloy wheels. For notes on the temporary spare wheel, see page 237. 302 Technical Data (ctd.) Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) Saloon / Hatch Tyre pressure for load of up to 3 people Tyre pressure ECO1) Tyre pressure loaded with for full load up to 3 people Engine2) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DTH 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16 2,4/35 2,4/35 – – 2,5/36 3,0/44 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2,3/33 2,3/33 2,6/38 2,6/38 2,4/35 2,9/42 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16 2,3/33 2,3/33 – – 2,4/35 2,9/42 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2,2/32 2,2/32 2,5/36 2,5/36 2,3/33 2,8/41 215/55 R 16, 2,5/36 2,3/33 – – 2,7/39 3,2/46 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2,6/38 2,4/35 – – 2,7/39 3,2/46 2,7/39 2,4/35 – – 2,8/41 3,3/48 4,2/61 4,2/61 – – 4,2/61 4,2/61 Z 19 DT Z 30 DT 225/45 R 17 all 3) T 115/70 R 16 1) To reduce fuel consumption as much as possible. 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 3) 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi. For notes on the temporary spare wheel, see page 237. Technical Data (ctd.) Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) Estate Tyre pressure ECO1) Tyre pressure loaded with for full load up to 3 people Engine2) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16, 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2,0/29 2,2/32 2,4/35 2,6/38 2,4/35 2,9/42 Z 20 NET 205/55 R 163) 2,4/35 2,4/35 – – 2,5/36 3,0/44 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2,3/33 2,3/33 2,6/38 2,6/38 2,4/35 2,9/42 195/65 R153), 205/55 R 16 2,3/33 2,3/33 – – 2,4/35 2,9/42 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2,2/32 2,2/32 2,5/36 2,5/36 2,3/33 2,8/41 T 115/70 R 164) 4,2/61 4,2/61 – – 4,2/61 4,2/61 Z 22 YH, Z 22 SE all 1) Tyre pressure for load of up to 3 people 1) To reduce fuel consumption as much as possible. 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 3) Only permitted as winter tyres. 4) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi. 303 For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237. 304 Technical Data (ctd.) Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) Estate Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Z 28 NEL, Z 28 NET 215/55 R 162) 2,5/36 2,3/33 2,7/39 3,2/46 215/50 R 172), 225/45 R 172), 225/45 R 182) 2,7/39 2,4/35 2,9/42 3,4/49 215/55 R 163) 2,6/38 2,4/35 2,8/41 3,3/48 173), 3) 215/50 R 225/45 R 18 2,7/39 2,4/35 2,9/42 3,4/49 225/45 R 173) 2,8/41 2,5/36 3,0/44 3,5/51 235/35 R 19, 235/40 R 18 2,9/42 2,6/38 3,1/45 3,5/51 225/45 R 174) 2,8/41 2,5/36 3,0/44 3,5/51 T 115/70 R 165) 4,2/61 4,2/61 4,2/61 4,2/61 all 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi. Tyre pressure for full load Engine1) Vectra VXR 1) Tyre pressure for load of up to 3 people Sales designation, see pages 284, 285. Version with manual transmission. Version with automatic transmission. Only permitted as winter tyres on Vauxhall-approved alloy wheels. For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 237. Technical Data (ctd.) Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) Tyre pressure for load of up to 3 people Tyre pressure ECO1) Tyre pressure loaded with for full load up to 3 people Front Front Rear Rear Front Rear Z 19 DTL, 195/65 R 15, Z 19 DTH 205/55 R 16 2,4/35 2,4/35 – – 2,5/36 3,0/44 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2,3/33 2,3/33 2,6/38 2,6/38 2,4/35 2,9/42 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16 2,3/33 2,3/33 – – 2,4/35 2,9/42 215/55 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2,2/32 2,2/32 2,5/36 2,5/36 2,3/33 2,8/41 215/55 R 16 2,5/36 2,3/33 – – 2,7/39 3,2/46 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 2,6/38 2,4/35 – – 2,7/39 3,2/46 2,7/39 2,4/35 – – 2,8/41 3,3/45 4,2/61 4,2/61 4,2/61 4,2/61 4,2/61 4,2/61 Estate Engine2) Z 19 DT Z 30 DT Tyres 225/45 R 17 all 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi. 305 3) T 115/70 R 16 1) To reduce fuel consumption as much as possible. 2) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 3) For notes on the temporary spare wheel, see page 237. 306 Technical Data (ctd.) Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) Saloon / Hatch / Estate with 19-inch wheels Tyre pressure for load of up to 3 people Tyre pressure for full load Engine1) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Z 18 XE, Z 18 XER, Z 22 SE, Z 22 YH 235/35 R 19 2,7/39 2,4/35 2,8/41 3,3/48 215/55 R 225/45 R 17 , 205/50 R 172) 2,3/33 2,3/33 2,5/36 3,0/44 235/35 R 19 Z 20 NET, Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DTH Z 28 NEL, Z 28 NET Z 30 DT 162), 2) 2,7/39 2,4/35 2,8/41 3,3/48 162), 2) 215/55 R 225/45 R 17 2,3/33 2,3/33 2,5/36 3,0/44 205/50 R 172) 2,7/39 2,4/35 2,8/41 3,3/48 235/35 R 19 2,9/42 2,6/38 3,1/45 3,5/51 215/55 R 162), 225/45 R 172) 2,8/41 2,5/36 3,0/44 3,5/51 205/50 R 172) 2,9/42 2,6/38 3,1/45 3,5/51 235/35 R 19 2,9/42 2,6/38 3,1/45 3,5/51 162), 2) 2,7/39 2,5/36 2,9/42 3,4/49 205/50 R 172) 2,9/42 2,6/38 3,1/45 3,5/51 4,2/61 4,2/61 4,2/61 4,2/61 215/55 R 225/45 R 17 all T 115/70 R 16 3) 1) Sales designation, see pages 284, 285. 2) Only permitted as winter tyres. 3) 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa /14.5 psi. For notes on the temporary spare wheel, see page 237. Technical Data 307 Electrical system Battery Voltage 12 Volt Amp hours 55 Ah / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 / 72 Ah 3 / 85 Ah 3 Battery for radio remote control of central locking system CR 20 32 Battery for remote control of auxiliary heater/ventilation AAA LR 06 308 Technical Data Capacities (approx. litre) Engine1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL, Z 28 NET Fuel tank (nominal capacity) Saloon / hatch estate 61 60 61 60 61 60 61 60 61 60 61 60 4.25 4.5 6.0 4.75 5.0 6.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.75 1.0 1.0 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 Engine oil with filter change between MIN and MAX on dipstick Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wash system with headlight wash system 1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. Technical Data Capacities (approx. litre) Engine1) Z 19 DTL Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 30 DT Fuel tank (nominal capacity) Saloon / hatch estate 61 60 61 60 61 60 61 60 4,3 4,3 4,3 7,5 0,7 0,7 0,7 1,0 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 2.9 5.6 Engine oil with filter change between MIN and MAX on dipstick Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wash system with headlight wash system 1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285. 309 310 Technical Data Dimensions (approx. mm) Saloon / Hatch Estate Saloon VXR Estate VXR Overall length 4611 4839 4642 4870 Overall width 1798 1798 1798 1798 Width with two exterior mirrors 2036 2036 2036 2036 Overall height 1460 1500 1460 1500 Length of luggage compartment floor 1047 1176 1047 1176 Luggage compartment width maximum between the wheel arches 1396 972 1079 1060 1396 972 1079 1060 Height of luggage compartment opening 6141) 767 614 767 Wheelbase 2700 2830 2700 2830 11.50 11.50 11.50 11.50 Turning circle diameter 1) 2) 4-door saloon 324 mm. In metres. 2) Technical Data Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment with removable coupling ball bar 3, Saloon / hatch All dimensions refer to factory-fitted towing equipment. Dimension mm A 334 B 1061 C 492.5 D 486.5 E 218 F 495 G 492.5 H 201 9 Warning Only use towing equipment approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retrofitting of towing equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 311 312 Technical Data Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment with pivoting coupling ball bar 3, Estate All dimensions refer to factory-fitted towing equipment. Dimension mm A 396.5 B 157.5 C 386 D 74 E 630 F 590 G 491 H 486 I 480 J 379.5 9 Warning Only use towing equipment approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retrofitting of towing equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Technical Data 313 314 Index Index A ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ............... 212 Accessories ............................ 124, 127, 234 Accessory socket .............................89, 101 Adaptive brake light ............................. 210 Adaptive Forward Lighting .................. 131 Bulb replacement ............................... 257 Driving abroad ................................... 135 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) Bulb replacement ............................... 257 Driving abroad ................................... 135 Air conditioning system ......................... 142 Air intake ................................................ 168 Air outlet ................................................. 168 Air quality sensor ................................... 159 Air recirculation system ........ 150, 155, 163 Air vents ................................................. 144 Airbags ................................................... 112 Alarm ........................................................ 76 Alarm system ........................................... 74 Alternator ................................................. 35 Antenna .................................................... 59 Anti-corrosion service ............................ 267 Antifreeze ............................................... 270 Antifreeze protection ....................270, 275 Anti-knock quality of fuel ...................... 190 Octane number ..........................284, 285 Anti-theft locking system ........................ 66 Anti-theft protection ............................... 22 Aquaplaning .......................................... 218 Armrest ..................................................... 84 Ashtray ........................................... 102, 134 Automatic air recirculation mode ........ 163 Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror .. 126 Automatic transmission .................. 20, 178 Automatic mode ................................ 179 Driving programme ........................... 181 Fault .................................................... 184 Interruption of power supply ............ 185 Kickdown ............................................ 182 Manual mode ..................................... 180 Selector lever ........................20, 179, 180 Selector lever lock .............................. 179 Winter programme ............................ 182 Automatic wiping .................................... 17 Auxiliary heating ................................... 165 Programming ..................................... 166 Remote control .................................. 167 B Battery ....................................187, 276, 307 Interruption of power supply ......................138, 177, 185 Battery discharge protection ............... 134 Before starting off .................21, 22, 23, 24 Belt tensioners ....................................... 107 Bleeding, diesel fuel system .................. 229 Board information display ...................... 42 Bonnet ...................................................... 80 Boot, see Luggage compartment .... 70, 94 Brake assist ............................................ 210 Brake light .............................................. 210 Brake system ............................................ 35 Brakes ..................................................... 210 ABS ..................................................... 212 Brake assist ........................................ 210 Brake fluid .......................................... 272 Brake lights ........................................ 258 Brake servo unit ................................. 186 Foot brake .................................. 210, 211 Hand brake ........................................ 211 Bulb replacement .................................. 252 Bulbs ............................................... 127, 252 C Capacities .............................................. 308 Car Pass ......................................................2 Caravan/trailer towing .................. 186, 220 Care ........................................................ 278 Catalytic converter ................193, 197, 229 CDC (Continuous Damping Control) ... 200 Central locking system ............................ 66 Centre console lighting ......................... 134 Changing the battery Radio remote control .......... 65, 167, 307 Changing tyre/wheel type .................... 214 Changing wheels ................................... 238 Chassis number, see vehicle identification number ................................................. 283 Check control ..................................... 28, 58 Child restraint system ................... 124, 127 Child safety locks ............................ 77, 137 Cigarette lighter ............................ 101, 134 Climate control ...................................... 142 Clutch operation .................................... 187 CO2 emissions ....................................... 287 Code numbers ............................................2 Index Cold start ................................................ 187 Colour information display ..................... 42 Continuous Damping Control ............... 200 Continuous Damping Control (CDC) .... 200 Contrast .................................................... 53 Control indicator ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 213 Airbag ................................................. 117 Engine electronics .............................. 196 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) .... 198 Exhaust ............................................... 195 Immobiliser ........................................... 63 Parking distance sensor ............131, 205 Tyre pressure monitoring system ..... 209 Control indicators ..............................10, 34 Adaptive Forward Lighting .........38, 131 Belt tensioners .................................... 108 Brake system ...................................... 212 Cruise control ..................................... 202 IDS+ ..................................................... 201 Cool box ................................................... 90 Coolant ................................................... 270 Coolant level .......................................... 271 Coolant temperature display ................. 41 Coolant thermometer .............................. 41 Cooled glove compartment .................. 146 Cooling ...........................................151, 156 Correcting time ..................................46, 52 Coupling socket load ............................. 226 Courtesy light ......................................... 133 Courtesy lights Bulb replacement ............................... 262 Cruise control ......................................... 202 Curtain airbags ...................................... 116 Curve lighting .................................. 32, 131 D Dashboard, see Instrument panel ........... 8 Data .................................................. 62, 282 Date .................................................... 44, 47 Daytime running lights .......................... 128 Decommissioning .................................. 277 Demisting and defrosting Windows ............................................. 149 With climate control system ............. 161 With air conditioning system .... 152, 157 Diesel fuel filter ...................................... 270 Diesel fuel system .......................... 229, 270 Diesel particle filter ......... 37, 145, 187, 197 Dimensions ............................................. 310 Dipped beam ................................... 14, 128 Bulb replacement ...................... 253, 255 Display ........................................39, 42, 179 Display mode ........................................... 54 Door locks ........................................ 62, 281 Doors ........................................................ 36 Door-to-door illumination ..................... 132 Drink holders .......................................... 105 Driver’s seat with climate control ......... 146 Driving abroad ......................190, 264, 265 Headlights .......................................... 135 Toll system ........................................... 61 Driving hints ........................................... 186 315 E Easytronic ........................................ 19, 170 Driving programmes ......................... 173 Fault ................................................... 176 Interruption of power supply ............ 177 Kickdown ............................................ 174 Selector lever ....................................... 19 Starting off ......................................... 172 Winter programme ............................ 174 Economical driving ........................ 186, 188 Electric seat adjustment ......................... 84 Electric sun roof ..................................... 139 Electric windows .................................... 136 Electrical system ....................246, 276, 307 Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering .......... 11, 37, 186 Electro-hydraulic power-assisted steering fluid ..................................................... 283 Electronic components .......................... 276 Electronic immobiliser ............................. 63 Electronic Stability Program ................. 198 Engine code ...........................283, 284, 285 Engine control indicator ....................... 196 Engine oil ............................................... 268 Engine oil change .................................. 269 Engine oil consumption ........................ 268 Engine oil filter ....................................... 269 Engine oil level ................................. 38, 268 Engine oil pressure .................................. 34 Engine speed ......................................... 187 Engine wash ........................................... 281 Environmental protection ............. 269, 278 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ....... 198 316 Index Exhaust control indicator ...................... 195 Exhaust gases ........................................ 196 Exhaust system ...................................... 196 Exterior mirrors ...........................6, 126, 145 F Fan ......................................... 147, 154, 267 Filling station Capacities ...................................308, 309 Engine oil level ................................... 268 Fuel .................................... 190, 284, 285 Ignition key ............................................. 2 Opening the bonnet ............................ 80 Tyre pressure ..............................189, 299 Vehicle data ....................................... 283 Windscreen wash system .................. 275 First-aid kit, ....................................127, 234 Flat tyre .................................................. 242 FlexOrganizer .......................................... 98 Fog lights ................................................ 130 Bulb replacement ............................... 258 Fog tail light ........................................... 130 Bulb replacement ............................... 258 Foot brake ......................................210, 211 Front passenger airbag ........................ 112 Fuel ................................ 190, 191, 284, 285 Fuel consumption ................. 188, 190, 287 Fuel filter ................................................. 270 Fuel gauge ............................................... 41 Fuel level ................................................... 41 Fuel system, diesel ................................. 229 Fuses ....................................................... 246 G Generator, see Alternator ....................... 35 Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories ........................... 24 Glove compartment .............................. 103 Glove compartment lighting ................ 134 Bulb replacement .............................. 263 Graphical information display ............... 42 Gross vehicle weight .............................. 293 Gross vehicle weight rating .................. 293 H Halogen headlight system ................... 253 Bulb replacement .............................. 253 Driving abroad ................................... 135 Hand brake ................................21, 22, 211 Hazard warning lights ............................ 16 Head restraints ......................6, 27, 82, 127 Headlamp wash system ......................... 17 Headlight flash ........................................ 15 Headlight range adjustment ........ 129, 252 Headlight switch ......................14, 128, 129 Headlight wash system ......................... 275 Headlights ................................................ 14 Daytime running lights ...................... 128 Driving abroad ................................... 135 Fog lights ............................................ 130 Reversing lights .................................. 130 Warning device .................................... 22 Heated exterior mirrors ................... 18, 145 Heated front seats ................................ 145 Heated rear seats .................................. 145 Heated rear window ....................... 18, 145 Heating ..................................142, 148, 156 Seats ................................................... 145 With climate control system ............. 160 With air conditioning system .... 152, 157 Height adjustment seat belts ............................................ 109 Steering wheel ..................................... 14 High-pressure cleaners .........223, 280, 281 Horn .......................................................... 16 I Identification plate ................................ 282 IDS+ (Interactive Driving System) . 198, 200 Ignition logic ...................................... 47, 54 Ignition switch .............................................7 Ignition system .............................. 267, 276 Immobiliser .............................................. 63 Information display ................................. 42 Infotainment system ............................... 60 Inspection system .................................. 266 Instrument display .................................. 40 Instrument illumination ......................... 133 Bulb replacement .............................. 263 Instrument panel ........................................8 Instruments ........................................ 34, 40 Interactive Driving System (IDS+) . 198, 200 Interior mirror ..............................................6 Universal remote control .................... 77 Interruption of power supply .... 56, 59, 138 Easytronic ........................................... 177 Electric windows ................................ 138 Selector lever lock .............................. 185 ISOFIX .................................................... 123 Index J Jack ......................................................... 238 Jump leads ............................................. 230 K Key extending ............................................. 62 ignition lock ................................7, 21, 63 Locking doors ....................................... 66 Remove ................................................. 22 Starting the engine ....................7, 21, 63 Key numbers .............................................. 2 Keys .......................................................... 62 L Language selection ...........................47, 52 Lashing eyes ............................................ 98 Leather trim ........................................... 280 Level control system .............................. 206 Light switch .............................................. 14 Lighting ......................................14, 35, 128 Driving abroad ................................... 135 Loading .................................................. 225 Locking doors ...................................... 2, 66 Locking from the inside ........................... 67 Locks ....................................................... 281 Lubricants ......................................268, 283 Luggage compartment Bulb replacement .............................. 263 Extension .............................................. 94 FlexOrganizer ...................................... 98 Lashing eyes ........................................ 98 Lighting .............................................. 134 Loading ...................................... 225, 293 Locking ................................................. 70 Safety net ............................................. 96 Luggage compartment cover ................ 95 Lumbar support ................................... 4, 85 M Main beam ....................................... 14, 128 Bulb replacement ...................... 254, 256 Control indicator .................................. 36 Maintenance .................................... 24, 266 Air conditioning system ..................... 169 Antifreeze protection ........................ 270 Brake fluid .......................................... 272 Brakes ................................................. 210 Catalytic converter ............................ 197 Engine oil .................................... 268, 269 Fuel consumption .............................. 189 Tyre pressure ...................................... 215 Tyres ................................................... 217 Windscreen wiper .............................. 273 Manual transmission ............................... 19 Mirrors ................................................ 6, 126 Misted windows .......................18, 149, 161 Mobile telephone ..................................... 61 Motorway lighting ........................... 32, 131 Muffler, see Exhaust system ................. 196 317 N Number plate lighting .......................... 261 Number plate lights Bulb replacement .............................. 261 Number plates ....................................... 277 O Octane numbers ....................190, 284, 285 Odometer ................................................. 40 Oil change ............................................. 269 Oil consumption .................................... 268 Oil filter change ..................................... 269 Oil level ................................................... 268 Oil pressure .............................................. 34 Oils .......................................................... 268 Operating temperature ........................ 187 Outside temperature gauge .................. 43 Overrun .......................................... 187, 189 P Paintwork damage ............................... 280 Parking ............................................. 22, 204 Parking distance sensor ........................ 204 Parking lights ................................... 14, 132 Bulb replacement .............................. 257 Parking the vehicle .................................. 22 Parts ................................................. 24, 127 Pedals ..................................................... 187 Performance .......................................... 287 Petrol ......................................190, 284, 285 Pinking .................................................... 190 Pollen filter ............................................. 168 Position memory ............................ 6, 85, 86 318 Index Power assisted steering, see electro-hydraulic power assisted steering .......... 186 Preheating ................................................ 37 Pushing, towing ..................................... 229 Q Quickheat .......................................148, 156 R Radio ........................................................ 59 Radio equipment (CB) ............................. 61 Radio reception ....................................... 59 Radio remote control Auxiliary heating ................................ 167 Central locking system ........................ 64 Universal remote control ..................... 77 Rain sensor .............. 17, 138, 140, 273, 279 Reading lights ................................133, 134 Rear light cluster .................................... 128 Bulb replacement ............................... 258 Rear window wash system ......17, 275, 279 Refuelling ................................................ 191 Remote control Auxiliary heating ................................ 167 Central locking system ........................ 64 Steering wheel ................................29, 60 Universal remote control ..................... 77 Replacement keys ................................... 62 Reversible carpet ..................................... 98 Reversing lights Bulb replacement ............................... 258 Roof load ............................... 100, 186, 189 Roof rack ........................................189, 220 Roof racks ......................................189, 220 Running-in .............................................. 186 Brakes ................................................. 210 S Safeguard against unauthorised use ........................... 2, 7, 23 Safety ..................................................... 106 Safety accessories ......................... 124, 234 Safety net ................................................. 96 Safety systems ....................................... 106 Saving energy ........................................ 188 Seat adjustment .................................. 3, 84 Seat belts ...............................106, 109, 280 Seat height adjustment ............................ 4 Seat occupancy recognition ................. 118 Seat position ............................................ 81 Seats ....................................................... 3, 4 Extending the luggage compartment 94 heated ................................................ 145 With climate control .......................... 146 Selector lever .................................. 171, 179 Selector lever lock ............................ 20, 179 Interruption of power supply ............ 185 Self-diagnosis ........................108, 117, 213 Self-help ................................................. 229 Automatic transmission .................... 185 Central locking system ........................ 69 Electric sun roof ................................. 141 Electric windows ................................. 138 Information display ............................. 44 Radio remote control .......................... 65 Service Booklet ........................................ 24 Service interval display ......................... 266 Service work ..................................... 24, 266 Side airbags ........................................... 114 Signal system ........................................... 15 Spare keys ................................................ 62 Spare wheel ................................... 236, 238 Speed ............................................. 188, 189 Fuel consumption ...................... 188, 189 Speedometer ........................................... 40 Sport mode ...................................... 36, 200 Starter switch ................................. 7, 21, 63 Starting the engine .......7, 21, 63, 171, 229 Self-help ............................................. 229 Steam-jet cleaners ................223, 280, 281 Steering column lock ........................... 7, 22 Steering wheel adjustment ..................... 14 Steering wheel remote control ......... 29, 60 Stowage compartments ......... 83, 103, 104 Sun blind ................................................ 141 Sun roof .................................................. 139 Sun shade ...................................... 140, 141 System settings .................................. 46, 51 T Tables ................................................. 30, 91 Tachometer ............................................. 40 Tail lights ................................................ 128 Bulb replacement .............................. 258 Tailgate .................................................... 70 Tank Fuel gauge ........................................... 41 Technical data ...................................... 282 Telephone, see Mobile telephone .......... 61 Temperature regulation ............... 147, 160 Tempomat, see cruise control .............. 202 Temporary spare wheel ................ 219, 237 Index The first 600 miles / 1000 km ................ 186 Thigh support ...................................... 5, 85 Tightening torque ..........................242, 299 Time ....................................................44, 47 Toll systems .............................................. 61 Tools ....................................................... 238 Towing .................................................... 232 Towing equipment ................................ 221 Towing eye .....................................232, 233 Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) .................. 226 Transmission display ............................. 170 Transmission, automatic .................20, 178 Automatic mode ................................ 179 Driving programme ........................... 181 Fault .................................................... 184 Interruption of power supply ............ 185 Kickdown ............................................ 182 Selector lever ..............................179, 180 Selector lever lock .............................. 179 Winter programme ............................ 182 Transmission, Easytronic ....................... 170 Driving programmes .......................... 173 fault ..................................................... 176 Interruption of power supply ............ 177 Kickdown ............................................ 174 Selector lever ................................19, 172 Winter programme ............................ 174 Transmission, manual ............................. 19 Travel Assistant .................................30, 87 Tread depth ........................................... 217 Trip computer ..............................28, 48, 54 Trip odometer .......................................... 40 Triple information display ....................... 42 TSA (Trailer Stability Assist) .................. 226 Turn lighting .................................... 32, 131 Turn signal lights ..................................... 15 Turn signals Bulb replacement .............................. 258 Twin Audio ......................................... 29, 60 Tyre chains ..................................... 219, 299 Tyre condition ........................................ 217 Tyre pressure .........................206, 215, 299 Tyre pressure monitoring system ......... 206 Tyre repair kit ........................................ 242 U Units of measure ............................... 47, 53 Unleaded fuel ............... 190, 193, 284, 285 Used oil ................................................... 269 V Valve cap key ........................................ 215 Vauxhall alarm system ........................... 74 Vauxhall Service .............................. 24, 264 Vehicle care ........................................... 278 Vehicle decommissioning ..................... 277 Vehicle identification number .............. 283 Vehicle keys, see Keys ............................. 62 Vehicle recommissioning ...................... 277 Ventilation ..................... 142, 148, 155, 162 W Warning buzzers ..................................... 22 Warning messages ...................... 45, 50, 51 Warning triangle, .................................. 127 Wash fluid reservoir, windscreen wash system ..................... 275 Wheels .................................................... 214 319 Wheels, tyres .......................................... 214 Windows Demisting and defrosting .. 18, 149, 152, 157, ..................................................... 161 Windscreen wash system ........................ 17 Antifreeze protection ........................ 275 Wash fluid reservoir ........................... 275 Windscreen washer system Capacities .................................. 308, 309 Windscreen wiper ............................ 16, 273 Winter mode Starting-off aid .................................. 174 Winter operation Battery ................................................ 187 Coolant, antifreeze ............................ 270 Fuel consumption .............................. 189 Fuel for diesel engines ...................... 191 Heating ..............................142, 152, 157 Locks .................................................. 281 Tyre chains ................................. 219, 299 Window demisting and defrosting ... 149 Windscreen wash system, antifreeze protection ................................................ 275 Winter programme ................................ 174 Winter tyres .................................... 219, 299 X Xenon headlight system ....................... 255 Bulb replacement .............................. 255 Driving abroad .................................. 135 320 Index